Honda 2015 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2015-Accord-Coupe-2-Door-Owners-Manual-106962 honda-2015-accord-coupe-2-door-owners-manual-106962

Coupe Owners Manual Pdf A3L1515OM 2015 Honda Accord Coupe Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2015-Honda-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816824 honda-2015-honda-accord-coupe-owners-manual-816824 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 557

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

0 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

1 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

A Few Words About Safety

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

2 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.

2 Safe Driving P. 27
For Safe Driving P. 28

Seat Belts P. 32

Airbags P. 39

2 Instrument Panel P. 67
Indicators P. 68

Gauges and Displays P. 81

2 Controls P. 85
Clock P. 86
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 88
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 109
Adjusting the Seats P. 127

2 Features P. 149
Audio System P. 150
Customized Features P. 274

Audio System Basic Operation P. 156, 178, 211
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 312

2 Driving P. 391
Before Driving P. 392
Refueling P. 447

Towing a Trailer P. 397
Fuel Economy P. 449

2 Maintenance P. 451
Before Performing Maintenance P. 452
Maintenance MinderTM P. 455
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 497

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 503
Tools P. 504
Overheating P. 518

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 505
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 520

2 Information P. 529
Specifications P. 530
Emissions Testing P. 537

Identification Numbers P. 534
Warranty Coverages P. 539

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

3 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 52

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 99
Security System P. 103
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 110
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 135

Audio Error Messages P. 264
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 314, 351

When Driving P. 401
Accessories and Modifications P. 450

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 106
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 125
Climate Control System P. 144

General Information on the Audio System P. 270
Compass * P. 389

Braking P. 440

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 459
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485
Cleaning P. 498

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475
Battery P. 494

Engine Does Not Start P. 511
Fuses P. 524

Jump Starting P. 514
Emergency Towing P. 527

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 535
Authorized Manuals P. 541

Reporting Safety Defects P. 536
Customer Service Information P. 542

P. 4

Safety Labels P. 65

Safe Driving

P. 27

Instrument Panel

P. 67

Controls

P. 85

Features

P. 149

Driving

P. 391

Maintenance

P. 451

Handling the Unexpected

P. 503

Information

P. 529

Index

P. 546

Parking Your Vehicle P. 444

Remote Transmitter Care P. 495

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 517

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

4 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ ECON Button (P 420)
❙ System Indicators (P 68)
❙ Gauges (P 81)
❙ Information Display (P 82)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 111)
❙ Audio/Information Screen
(P 157, 182, 214)

❙ Audio System (P 156, 178, 211)
❙ Audio with Touch Screen * (P 179, 212)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Climate Control System (P 144)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 121)
❙ Heated Mirror Button * (P 121)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual

❙ Seat Heater Switches * (P 143)
❙ Ignition Switch*1 (P 110)

❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button * (P 436)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 433)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button * (P 430)

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

5 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 115)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 117)
❙ LaneWatchTM*(P 434)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) * (P 411, 415)
❙
(Display) Button (P 157, 182, 214)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 82)
❙ Brightness Control (P 120)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) * (P 411, 415)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 119)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 421)

❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 124)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P 220), () See Navigation System Manual

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 314, 351)

❙ SOURCE Button (P 155)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 155)
* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

6 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Window Switches (P 106)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 98)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 126)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 125)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 525)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)

❙ Parking Brake (P 440)
❙ Trunk Main Switch * (P 101)
❙ Glove Box (P 137)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 140)

❙ USB Port (P 151)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 152)
❙ Shift Lever
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 461)
❙ Trunk Release (P 99)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 448)
6

Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) (P 409)
Automatic Transmission
(P 413)

Manual Transmission
(P 417)

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

7 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 48)

(P 109)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Coat Hook (P 141)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 135)
❙ Seat Belts (P 32)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Map Lights (P 136)
❙ Moonroof Switch *
❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 142)

❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors

❙ Front Seat (P 127)
❙ Accessory Power
Socket (P 140)

❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 59)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 61)
❙ Rear Seat (P 134)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 57)
* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

8 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 459)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 119, 483)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 126)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 91)
❙ Headlights (P 115, 475)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 115, 479)
❙ Parking Lights (P 115, 480)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 117, 478)
❙ Tires (P 485, 505)
❙ How to Refuel (P 448)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 482)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 99)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 102)
❙ Trunk Release Button * (P 100)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 445)
❙ Rear Camera (P 446)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 481)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 481)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 481)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 481)

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

9 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Eco Assist System

Ambient Meter

Quick Reference Guide

Ambient Meter

(P 420)

● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 77)
Comes on when the ECON button is
pressed.

ECON Button (P 420)
Helps maximize fuel economy.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

10 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Safe Driving

(P 27)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P 39)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 52)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 32)

Before Driving Checklist (P 31)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

11 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Instrument Panel

(P 67)

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Speedometer

Temperature Gauge

System Indicators
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Smart Entry System
Indicator *

U.S.

Starter System
Indicator *

Canada
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator *
Maintenance Minder
Indicator

U.S.
Canada

Quick Reference Guide

Gauges (P 81)/Information Display (P 82)/
System Indicators (P 68)

Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)

Fuel Gauge

Tachometer
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *

Continuously variable
transmission (CVT) models

M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Automatic transmission models

M (Sequential shift mode)
Indicator/Gear position
Indicator

System Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
ECON mode
Indicator
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) Indicator*
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator*

Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator

U.S.

Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Canada
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

Fog Light Indicator *

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

Light Control
Indicator *

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

12 ページ

Controls

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

(P 85)

Quick Reference Guide

Clock (P 86)
Models without navigation system

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P 111)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.

Lights (P 115)
Light Control Switches
High Beam
Low Beam

Flashing

Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Adjusting the Clock (P 86)

Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

Rotate
press
.

to change minute, then

Wipers and Washers (P 119)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Turn Signals (P 115)

Models with navigation system

Turn Signal Control Lever
Right

The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.

Left

Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay

MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

13 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Steering Wheel (P 124)

Trunk (P 99)

Trunk Release
● To unlock and open the trunk:

Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside
(P 96)
● Pull either door inner handle to unlock
and open it at the same time.

• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote.
• Press the trunk release button * on the
trunk lid.

Power Windows (P 106)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, the passenger's window can
be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), the passenger's
window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button

Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

Window
Switch

Power Door Mirrors
(P 126)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks the
passenger’s door.
Adjustment Switch

*1: Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of
an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

14 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Climate Control System (P 144)
Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Models with navigation system

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 220)

AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Buttons

(Windshield Defroster) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons

(On/Off) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
MODE Control Button
/

(Fan Control) Buttons

Air flows from dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.

(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

15 ページ

Features

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

(P 149)

Audio System (P 156, 178, 211)
Models with one display

(P 156)
Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls
(P 155)
(+ / (- /

Button
Audio/Information
Screen

SOURCE
Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
CD/SiriusXM® */HDD */USB/iPod/Bluetooth/
Pandora® */AhaTM*/AUX.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD */USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.

CD Button
FM/AM Button
Button

CD Slot
AUX Button
PHONE Button
(CD Eject)
Button

DISP Button

SETTINGS Button

(Skip/Seek)
Button

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob

MENU Button
Selector Knob

BACK Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

Models with two displays

16 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

(P 178)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

Phone*1
Button

CD Slot
Clock*1
(CD Eject) Button

Source*1

(Tune Down) Icon*1

Title*1
DISP Button
(Tune Up) Icon*1
Scan*1

VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

Selector Knob

Presets*1

BACK Button

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

More*1
Audio with Touch Screen

*1:Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

17 ページ

Models with navigation system

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

(P 211)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

Source*1
(Power) Button

CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Title*1

(Tune Down) Icon*1
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
Presets*1

(Tune Up) Icon*1
Scan*1
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
More*1

Audio with Touch Screen
PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

BACK Button
Button

MENU Button
SETTINGS Button
Interface Dial/ENTER Button

*1:Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

Driving

18 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

(P 391)

Quick Reference Guide

Manual Transmission * (P 417)
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) * (P 409)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode When the shift lever is in (S

● Pulling a paddle shifter changes
(P 411)
● Allows you to manually shift
the mode from continuously
the transmission up or down
variable transmission (CVT) to
without removing your hands
7-speed manual shift mode.
from the steering wheel.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
M Indicator
displayed in the shift indicator.

When the shift lever is in (D
Shift Indicator
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

Shift Lever
Release
Button

Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Reverse
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.

Drive

● Normal driving.
● 7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.

Drive (S)
●
●
●
●

Better acceleration.
Increased engine braking.
Going up or down hills.
7-speed manual shift
mode can be used.

● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable
transmission (CVT) to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The
selected speed number is
displayed in the shift indicator.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

19 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Automatic Transmission * (P 413)
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Shift Lever

Gear
Position ● D-paddle shift mode: The
Indicator
transmission will shift back to
automatic mode once the system
detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Selected Gear
M Indicator
● Sequential shift mode: Holds the
Number
selected gear, and the M indicator
comes on.
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
● The selected gear position is
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter
shown in the instrument panel.

Quick Reference Guide

Paddle Shifters (P 415)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. ● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
● Shifting

Release
Button

Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Reverse
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.

Drive
Normal driving. D-paddle shift
mode can be used

Drive (S)
Sequential shift mode can be used.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

20 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

VSA® OFF Button (P 433)
Quick Reference Guide

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P 421)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Refueling (P 447)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)

Push the fuel fill door
release handle.

Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.

Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.

After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 436)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

21 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Maintenance

(P 451)

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.

Quick Reference Guide

Under the Hood (P 459)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch * fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.

Wiper Blades (P 483)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P 485)

Lights (P 475)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

22 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Handling the Unexpected
Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P 505)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.

Engine Won't Start
(P 511)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

Overheating (P 518)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P 524)

Emergency Towing

(P 520)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

(P 527)

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

(P 503)

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

23 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

What to Do If
●

The steering wheel may be locked.

Models without smart entry system
●

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.

Models with smart entry system*2
●

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 *1
and I cannot remove the
key. Why?

Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

Quick Reference Guide

The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q *1.
Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

Quick Reference Guide

24 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch *.
● The power mode * is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

25 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
● The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

26 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

27 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 30
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 32
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags....................................... 46

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 48
Airbag System Indicators.................... 49
Airbag Care ....................................... 51
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54

Safety of Larger Children ................... 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 65

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

28 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

29 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Safe Driving

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

30 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

6
10
7
8

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.

6
7
8
9
10
11

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

31 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

■ Safety CheckList

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 96

If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 72

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.

1Safety CheckList

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 130

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

32 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59

1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

33 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Seat Belt Reminder

1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

1Seat Belt Reminder

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
before the driver's seat belt is fastened, the
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 52

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

34 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

35 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

Correct
Seated
Posture.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

Buckle

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

36 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

37 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

38 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Safe Driving

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

39 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving

8
6

8
11

8
8

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

40 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:

d An electronic control unit that continually

monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

h Impact

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.

e Automatic

front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.

j An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k Safing

b Two

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

c Two

side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.

Sensor

g Weight

sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).

rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

41 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

42 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags

Front Airbags (SRS)

1Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

43 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

44 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Safe Driving

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

45 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.

The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors

Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.

Safe Driving

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.

Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 499

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

46 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

Side
Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

47 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

Safe Driving

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

48 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

1Side Curtain Airbags

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

49 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

50 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.

Canada

■ When the passenger airbag off

Safe Driving

indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:

• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.

• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.

• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

51 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

1Airbag Care

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

52 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

53 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.

Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 65

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

54 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

55 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Continued

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

56 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

57 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors

Rigid Type

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

Flexible Type
Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

58 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Tether Strap
Hook
Safe Driving
Anchor

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

59 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer's
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

60 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

61 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points

Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

Safe Driving

Cover

A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.

1Adding Security with a Tether

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.

Anchor
Outer Position

Tether Strap
Hook

Rear outer seating positions

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs.
Rear center seating position

2. Remove the head restraint.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 131
Anchor
Center Position

Tether Strap
Hook

All positions

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
u Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Rear center seating position

5. Reinstall the head restraint.
u Make sure to adjust the head restraint in
its highest position.
Anchor

2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 131

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

62 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

63 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

64 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

65 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

Sun Visor
U.S. models

Dashboard
U.S. models only

Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.

Canadian models

Doorjambs
U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

66 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

67 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 68
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 79
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 81
Information Display............................ 82

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

68 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Indicators

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

U.S.

Instrument Panel

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)

●

●
●

●

(Red)

U.S.

Canada

●

Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off if the
parking brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and
goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake
system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
you drive with the parking brake not fully
released.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a component
related to braking.

●

Comes on while driving - Make sure the
parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid
level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on
while driving P. 522

●

Comes on along with the ABS indicator Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On P. 522

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

(Amber)

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

69 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop
in a safe place.

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off either when the engine
starts or after several seconds if the engine did not
start. If “readiness codes” have not been set, it
blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions
control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is
detected.

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop
the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait
for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a
dealer.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On P. 520

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 537

●

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks P. 521
●

Charging System
Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On P. 520

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

70 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *

On/Blinking

●

Indicates the current shift lever position.

Explanation

2 Shifting P. 409, 413

Instrument Panel

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Indicator

Name
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is
applied.

Explanation

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 411

Automatic transmission models

Indicator

Name
M (Sequential
shift mode)
Indicator/Gear
Position
Indicator

* Not available on all models

On/Blinking
●

Explanation

Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is
applied.
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 415

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

71 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts
and acceleration and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer immediately.

●

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not
wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt,
the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off
when you and the front passenger fasten their
seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger
has fastened the seat belt - A detection
error may have occurred in the sensor. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator

Low Fuel
Indicator

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low
(approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem
with the ABS.

●

Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

●

Instrument Panel

●

Transmission
Indicator *

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 33

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking ability but
no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 442

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

72 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
OFF Indicator

●
●

●

Door and Trunk
Open Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following
is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at
all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®
system or hill start assist system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
P. 432

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if either door or the trunk is not
completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
either door or the trunk is opened while driving.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 433

●

Goes off when both doors and the trunk are
closed.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

73 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator

On/Blinking
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
system.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch is
turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not moved
within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration
process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are determined to
be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.

●

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if
there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a
compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with
a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired
or replaced and put back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.

●

Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals when you press
the hazard warning button.

●

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn
signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb
immediately.

●

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at
all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On P. 522

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs
to be calibrated.

Instrument Panel

●

Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator

Explanation

2 TPMS Calibration P. 436

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 479, 481

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

74 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
High Beam
Indicator

Instrument Panel

Lights On
Indicator
Fog Light
Indicator *

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

●

Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in
AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

●

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

●

Explanation

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.

Immobilizer
System Indicator

—
●

●

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has been
set.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch*1
while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds
when the driver's door is opened.

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out,
and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w *1
again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.

2 Security System Alarm P. 103

Indicator

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

75 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes
off.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.

●

Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle
in front of you. The beeper
sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent
a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.

●

Message

—

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too high.
The system activates when the temperature inside the system
cools down.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud,
etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and
message come back on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

76 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

●

Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

Blinks when your vehicle is too close
to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take
appropriate action to keep your vehicle
within the lane lines.

Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the
LDW camera is too high.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 LDW Camera P. 429

●

Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back
on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 LDW Camera P. 429

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message

—

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

77 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

●

Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.

CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator

●

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise
control.

Washer Level
Indicator *

●

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

●

2 Cruise Control P. 421

●

Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 474

●

Smart Entry
System
Indicator *

Comes on when the washer fluid gets low.

2 ECON Button P. 420

Instrument Panel

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you press the ECON button.

ECON Mode
Indicator

Explanation

●

Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is
due soon.
Comes on for a few seconds when you change
the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system or push button starting
system.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 455
●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at
all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

78 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
●

U.S.

Instrument Panel

Canada

On/Blinking

Starter System
Indicator *

●

Light Control
Indicator *

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the starter system has a problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15
seconds while pressing the brake pedal and
manually start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system or low beam headlights *.

●

Comes on while driving - The low beam
headlights may not be on. When conditions
allow you to drive safely, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

79 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 521

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

Continued

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

80 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Models with smart entry system

Message
Automatic
transmission/CVT
models

Instrument Panel
U.S. manual
transmission
models

Condition
●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .

●

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Explanation
●

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .

—

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

●

Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.

●

Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.

●

Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Canadian models

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

81 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

1Fuel Gauge

Instrument Panel

■ Tachometer

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 518

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

82 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Information Display
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Select/Reset
Knob

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature

Engine Oil Life

Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

83 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.

■ Trip Meter

1Trip Meter

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

knob. The trip meter is

■ Average Fuel Economy

Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

1Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.

You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 274

■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 455

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

84 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

85 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................... 86
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 88

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength *......................................90

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................... 96
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ............ 98
Opening and Closing the Trunk......... 99
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 103
Security System Alarm...................... 103
Opening and Closing the Windows ...106
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ...109

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 110
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 111
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 114
Turn Signals ..................................... 115
Light Switches.................................. 115
Fog Lights * ...................................... 117
Daytime Running Lights ................... 118
Wipers and Washers ........................ 119
Brightness Control ........................... 120
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
Button ........................................... 121

Driving Position Memory System * .... 122
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 124
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 125
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 126
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 127
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 135
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 144
Synchronized Mode ......................... 146
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 147

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

86 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
Models without navigation system

1Adjusting the Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Adjusting the Time
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
Models with one display

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

Controls

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment.
3. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
4. Rotate
to change minute, then press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Models without navigation system

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 274
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

87 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with one display

1Using the SETTINGS button

■ Using the SETTINGS button
CLOCK (SETTINGS)
Button
(6 (Reset) Button
(4 (Hour) Button

1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks.
2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time.
3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.

To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
press the (6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Controls

(5 (Minute) Button
Models with two displays

■ Using the audio with touch screen
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
3. Select 12H or 24H.
4. Press Set to set the time.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

88 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:

■ Master Keys
Master Key *

Smart Entry
Remote *

Use the key to start and stop the engine, to
lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote
transmitter or smart entry system * to lock and
unlock the doors and to open the trunk.

Controls

■ Smart entry remote *
Release Knob

Built-in Key

* Not available on all models

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.

1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 103
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

89 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

■ Valet Key *
Gray

1Valet Key *

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Controls

■ Key Number Tag

When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

90 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
Controls

* Not available on all models

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

91 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

■ Locking the doors

Lock Button
LED

If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 135

Controls

Unlock Button

Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, both doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 274

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
Models without smart entry system

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
All models

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

92 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
u The passenger’s door unlocks.

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 274

Controls

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

93 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
•
•

Door Lock Button

Press the door lock button on either door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; both doors and the trunk lock;
and the security system sets.

•

Controls

•

■ Locking the doors and the trunk

you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of locking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 274

* Not available on all models

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

94 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the passenger’s door handle:
u Both doors and the trunk unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Controls

Trunk Release Button

Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button * P. 100

* Not available on all models

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

95 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, the
passenger’s door locks at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
passenger’s door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 274

Unlock

■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

Controls

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver's door, the passenger’s
door locks at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.

■ Locking the passenger's door
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

96 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock

Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock

Controls

Pull the lock tab rearward.

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, the passenger’s door locks at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

97 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

Pull the inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.

The inner handles are designed to allow front seat
occupants to open the door in one motion. However
this feature requires that front seat occupants never
pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Inner Handle
Controls

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.
To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the audio/information screen.

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

98 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock both doors.
To Lock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, the passenger’s door locks/
unlocks at the same time.

To Unlock

Controls

Master Door
Lock Switch

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
Both doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■ Auto Door Unlocking
■ Driver’s door open mode

Both doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

99 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Controls

Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk
Release

Continued

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

100 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button *

■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the master
key * or the built-in key *.

Controls

Using the Trunk Release Button *
Trunk Release Button

Press the release button on the trunk lid after
the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
u The beeper will sound.

100

* Not available on all models

1Locking the trunk opener
Models without smart entry system

If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the valet key.

1Using the Trunk Release Button *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
• Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
• Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

101 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.

Trunk Button

Main Switch

OFF

1Trunk Main Switch *

The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
3. Lock the glove box.
4. Lock the trunk release.

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
valet key.

Controls

Trunk Main Switch *

2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 99

* Not available on all models

101

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

102 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.

Lever
Controls

102

1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

103 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.

Security System Alarm

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.

Controls

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.

1Immobilizer System

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.

However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift
lever is moved out of (P (automatic transmission/CVT models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

103

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

104 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
Controls

■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.

■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The
security system indicator goes off at the same time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

104

1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Moving the shift lever out of (P .
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

105 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.

■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

Controls

Panic Button

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

105

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

106 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to
open and close both windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passenger’s window from the
passenger's side.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
Controls

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch

Indicator

Passenger’s
Window Switch

■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

106

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0 *1.
Opening either door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

107 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function *
Close

Open

To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

Controls

■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote *
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.

Unlock
Button

* Not available on all models

Continued

107

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

108 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key *

Close
Open
Controls

108

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

109 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
Open
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Tilt

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

Controls

The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

109

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

110 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch *
1Ignition Switch *
Manual transmission models

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

3 WARNING

position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.

Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of

Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.

the key.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
All models

If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

110

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

111 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

ENGINE START/STOP Button *
■ Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

Automatic Transmission/CVT
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked*1.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.

Manual Transmission

Operating Range

Indicator

Controls

ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.

ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
Press the button without the shift
lever in (P .

Press the button.

Shift to (P then press the button.

U.S. models
Shift to (P .

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

Without pressing
the clutch pedal

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper
sounds.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 512
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.

*1 : Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

* Not available on all models

Continued

111

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

112 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode:
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

The steering wheel does not lock.
Controls

All models

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.

*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models

112

1Changing the Power Mode
Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

113 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.

■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning
buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.

Controls

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display notifies the driver
inside that the remote is out.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

113

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

114 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)

Without Smart Entry
System

●

Controls

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

ACCESSORY (I)

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (II)

●

START (III)

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

ON
Indicator is: On

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.

START
Off

With Smart Entry
Indicator-Off
Indicator-On or blinking
IndicatorIndicator-Off
● The mode automatically
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
On (engine is turned off)
●
Some electrical
START/STOP
power is shut down.
Off (engine is running)
returns to ON after the
● The steering wheel is
components such as the ● All electrical components
Button
engine starts.
locked*1.
audio system and the
can be used.
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.
*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

114

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

115 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
Right Turn

The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.

Left Turn

This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
1Light Switches

■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.

Controls

Light Switches

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 74
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

115

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

116 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Controls

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 274

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.

Light Sensor

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

116

The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright

Dark

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

117 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

■ Headlight Integration with Wipers *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature

This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

1Headlight Integration with Wipers *

2 Customized Features P. 274

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

Fog Lights *

1Fog Lights *

When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 74

Fog Light Switch
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

117

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

118 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

Daytime Running Lights
Models with bulb type parking lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:

Controls

• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off, or in
• The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch
or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
Models with bulb type parking lights

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

118

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

119 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Pull to
use
washer.

MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ Adjusting the delay
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Long delay

HI: High speed wipe
Short delay

■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

Controls

Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring

■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.

1Wipers and Washers

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then
remove the obstacle.

119

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

120 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control

Control Knob

When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

Controls

You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.

■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

120

1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
display.

(Select/Reset) knob switches the

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

121 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.

Controls

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

121

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

122 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

Driving Position Memory System *
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts
automatically to one of the two preset positions.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1

DRIVER 2

Controls

122

* Not available on all models

1Driving Position Memory System *
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

123 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

■ Storing a Position in Memory
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

■ Recalling the Stored Position
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

1. Move the shift lever to (P .
All models

2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.

After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Controls

SET Button

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.

1Storing a Position in Memory

1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2 ).
• Adjust the seat position.

•

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Shift into any position except (P .

•

Manual transmission models

Release the parking brake.

The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.

123

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

124 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

124

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
To adjust
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever
To lock
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

125 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab

Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 127

Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you, based in inputs
from the mirror sensor. This feature is always
active.

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

Down
Sensor

* Not available on all models

125

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

126 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors
Selector Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Mirror position adjustment

Adjustment Switch
Controls

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Outer Segment

The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.

Inner Segment

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

126

1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

127 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.

■ Adjusting the driver’s power seat *

Horizontal Position
Adjustment

1Adjusting the Seats

3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

Lumbar Support
Adjustment

Controls

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Height Adjustment

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

* Not available on all models

Continued

127

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

128 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.

Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

128

Driver’s seat is shown.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

129 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Continued

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

Controls

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

3 WARNING

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

129

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

130 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.

Controls

Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.

■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.

130

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

131 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Controls

A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3 WARNING

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

Continued

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
To remove the rear outer head restraints, fold down
the seat-back first.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 134

131

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

132 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.

Controls

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

132

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

133 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

■ Rear Seat Access

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
Driver side
Models with driver’s power seat

Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seatback forward.

Models with driver’s manual seat

Controls

Fold-down
Lever

When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip
over the front seat belt.
If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the
seat-back forward.

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever tilts the seat-back forward.

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment Lever
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment Lever

Release Lever

Passenger side

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever, or pushing down the front passenger
seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back
forward.
You can also use these levers to move the seat
forward.

133

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

134 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seat
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
Guide

Controls

2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 50

3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 131

134

The rear seat-back can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64

Center
Shoulder Belt

Release
Lever

1Folding Down the Rear Seat

Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

135 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

■ ON
Off

Door Activated Position

Off

Models without smart entry system

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 274

Controls

Door Activated
Position
On

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When either of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.

The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Models without smart entry system

• When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave either door open without the key in the
ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after about
15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

135

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

136 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights

1Map Lights

The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

Controls

136

When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and either door is open, the map light will
not go off when you press the lens.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

137 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

Glove Box

You can lock the glove box with the master
key or the built-in key.

Handle

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Controls

To Lock

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

Continued

137

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

138 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Center Pocket *
Pull the handle to open the pocket.

Handle
Controls

138

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

139 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE

■ Front seat beverage holders

Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders

Continued

139

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

140 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.

Controls

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.

■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

140

When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

141 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Coat Hooks

1Coat Hooks

There are coat hooks behind the center pillar
on both sides. Pull them down to use them.

1Cargo Hooks

The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.

Controls

■ Cargo Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.

Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 395

Continued

141

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

142 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
Push
Controls

142

Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

143 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Seat Heaters *

1Seat Heaters *

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.

Controls

Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

143

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

144 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor
vents
Controls

AUTO Button

Floor vents

Floor and
defroster
vents
(Recirculation) Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons

Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
/

(Fan Control) Buttons

A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
buttons.
3. Press the
(on/off) button to cancel.

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.

144

1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

145 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

Controls

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

145

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

146 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Models with navigation system

Controls

The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

146

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

147 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.

Sensor

Controls

Sensor

147

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

148

148 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

149 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
USB Port .......................................... 151
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 152
Audio System Theft Protection * ....... 153
Region Setting ................................. 154
Audio Remote Controls.................... 155
Models with one display

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 156
Audio/Information Screen ................ 157
Display Setup ................................... 162
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 163
Playing a CD .................................... 165
Playing an iPod ................................ 168
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 171
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 173
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 176

* Not available on all models

Models with two displays

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 178
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 179
Audio/Information Screen ................ 182
Display Setup ................................... 188
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 189
Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ................. 193
Playing a CD .................................... 196
Playing an iPod ................................ 199
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 203
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 206
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 209
Models with navigation system

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 211
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 212
Audio/Information Screen ................ 214

Display Setup................................... 219
Voice Control Operation .................. 220
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 228
Playing SiriusXM® Radio................... 232
Playing a CD .................................... 235
Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio ....238

Playing an iPod ................................ 248
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 256
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 259
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 262
Audio Error Messages ...................... 264

General Information on the Audio System.....270

Customized Features........................ 274
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * ... 312
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 314, 351
Compass * .......................................... 389

149

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

150 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Audio System
About Your Audio System
Models with navigation system

1About Your Audio System

See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service *. It can also
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disk Drive (HDD) audio *, USB flash
drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or
the icons on the touchscreen interface *.

SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 270
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

iPod
Features

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
USB Flash
Drive
Remote Controls

150

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.

* Not available on all models

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

151 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port

USB Port
Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.

1USB Port

• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

Features

•

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

151

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

152 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
Models with one display
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.

Models with two
displays

Features

152

Models with
navigation system

1Auxiliary Input Jack
Models with one display

You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX
button.
Models with two displays
Models with navigation system

You can return to AUX mode by selecting Change
Source on the Audio menu screen or Source on the
touchscreen.
Replacement of the audio system with other than a
genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack
inoperable.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

153 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection *

Audio System Theft Protection *
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the 12-volt battery is disconnected or goes dead.

* Not available on all models

Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
U.S. models

You can register the security code at Honda Owners
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.

Features

■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.
u If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the
audio security code. See step 3.
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter PIN Code appears on the audio/
information screen.
3. If the two steps do not work, you can enter the audio security code using the
touch screen. If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try
again. If you do not enter code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one
hour before trying again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.

1Audio System Theft Protection *

153

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

154 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting

Models with two displays

Region Setting
The audio system’s region setting may be lost when the battery is disconnected or
goes dead.
If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio
system. Follow the steps below:
1. Press
to select OK.
2. Rotate
to select the region you live in, then press .
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .

Features

154

1Region Setting
The region setting is required only when the battery
power is temporarily disconnected. It has been
usually set to your vehicle’s region type beforehand.
You cannot change the setting once you have
completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if
you selected an incorrect region.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

155 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM® * CD HDD * USB
Button
iPod Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * AhaTM*
(+ Button
AUX
Button

(- Button

Some mode appears only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Features

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, HDD *, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD, HDD * or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® * or AhaTM*
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls

155

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

156 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with one display

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

Button Selector Knob
Features

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

156

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

to select.
to enter.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 164
2 Radio text P. 164
2 Music Search P. 166, 169, 174
2 Scan P. 164, 167, 175
2 Random/Repeat P. 167, 170, 175
This product includes software codes licensed under
the conditions stated by the copyright holder.
For license conditions and the copy of the
corresponding source code, visit: http://
www.hondaopensource1.com/001

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

157 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Audio

Trip Computer
(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen
Features
Continued

157

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

158 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Features

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

158

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

159 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 151

Continued

•
•

Features

2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate
to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
u The preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press
to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

159

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

160 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Set, then press .

1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

■ Delete wallpaper
Features

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

160

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

161 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
SETTINGS Button

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Sound, then press .
Rotate
choices:

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

to scroll through the following

Selector Knob
Bass

Features

Treble

Fader

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

161

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

162 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.
Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

162

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

163 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen

VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
and
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Features

FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Continued

163

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

164 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
2. Rotate

while listening to an FM station.
to select the station, then press

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Refresh, then press .

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 155
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
screen.

Features

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press

164

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

to select Stop, or press the BACK button.

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

165 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Audio/Information Screen

VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

Features

CD Button
Press to play a CD.

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

165

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

166 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a folder.
4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

Features

Folder Selection

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

File Selection

166

1Playing a CD

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

167 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Features

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

Random/Repeat
is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

167

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

168 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port P. 151
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
Album Art

Features

AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

168

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

169 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1Playing an iPod

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a menu.
4. Press
to display the items on that menu.
5. Rotate
to select an item, then press .

Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 266

Features

Continued

169

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

170 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .

Features

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

170

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

171 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

U.S. models

1Playing Internet Radio

Compatible phones only

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

Audio/Information Screen
Features

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Rating Icon
Selector Knob
Turn to switch to another station.

AUX Button
Press to select Pandora®.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip Button
Press
to skip a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.

Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between
pause and resume.
Preset Button (2)
Press to select Dislike.

Preset Button (4)
Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (3)
Press to select Like.
Continued

171

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

172 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Dislike (Thumbs-down)
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.

Features

■ Operating a menu item
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select an item, then press

Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 267
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.

172

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

173 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port P. 151
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.

Features

AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

173

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

174 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a folder.
4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
Folder Selection
Features
File Selection

174

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 270
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 266

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

175 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Features

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat
is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

175

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

176 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 322
Audio/
Information
Screen

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

Features

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
VOL/
(Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.

Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.

Preset Button (1)
Press to resume
playing a file.
Preset Button (2)
Press to pause a
playing file.

176

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

177 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Features

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

■ To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.

177

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

178 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with two displays

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
buttons to access some audio functions.

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector Knob
Button

Features

178

BACK Button

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
Also press to select any mode. The available
mode includes Sound, Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

to select.
to enter.

Audio Menu Items
2 Sound P. 187
2 Station List P. 191
2 Save Preset P. 190, 195
2 Radio text P. 192
2 Music Search P. 197, 201, 207
2 Scan P. 192, 198, 208
2 Random/Repeat P. 198, 202, 208

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

179 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

icons to turn the page.

1Selecting an Audio Source
You can change the order of source icons displayed.

Features

Source List Icons

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Menu Items
1. Select Source,
, then Edit Order.
2. Select two icons, then select Done.
The locations of these icons are switched.
To go back to the original display order, select Default.

Select More to display the menu items.

Continued

179

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

180 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Changing the Screen Settings
1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

Features

■ Adjusting the Sound

The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.
1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

180

1Changing the Screen Settings

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 187

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

181 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
Select

Select

1Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
The phone operation screen is available when a
phone is paired to HFL.

to switch to the phone operation screen.
Features

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 314

181

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

182 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Using the

Press the

button

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Features

182

Audio

Trip Computer
(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

183 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Using the DISP button

Function Change Screen
DISP Button
Features

Selector Knob

Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.
Rotate
to select Audio, Phone, Info or Settings and press

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 314
■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features P. 274
Continued

183

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

184 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.
Press , rotate
to select an item, then press .

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Features

■ Deleting the history manually
1. Press
on the History of Trip A screen.
2. Rotate
to select Delete History, then press .
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

184

to select Yes,

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

185 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 151

Continued

•
•

Features

2. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate
to select Add New, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press
to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

185

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

186 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Features

186

1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

187 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
DISP (SETTINGS) Button

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Sound, then press

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector Knob
BACK Button

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer *

SVC

* Not available on all models

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

187

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

188 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

Features

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Others.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

188

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

189 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

Title
Select to display the information of
the current station.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Features

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.

Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

189

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

190 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.

1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
.

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press .
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

190

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store the station by pressing and holding a preset number.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 155
You can also switch the mode by pressing
and
selecting Change Source on the Audio menu
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

191 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select the station, then press .

Continued

Features

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press .
3. Rotate
to select UPDATE LIST, then press .

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

191

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

192 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Features

192

Audio with Touch Screen

2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 189

To turn off scan, select Stop Scan.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

193 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
Audio/Information Screen

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an SiriusXM® Radio category.

Audio with Touch Screen

Title
Select to display the information of
the current station.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.

Features

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.

* Not available on all models

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

193

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

194 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To Play the SiriusXM® Radio

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

1. Select the SiriusXM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 155
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 179

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
5. Rotate
6. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
to select Channel List, then press .
to select a channel from a list, then press .

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or the
preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

194

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

195 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
You can store 12 SiriusXM® stations into the preset
memory.

Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate
4. Rotate
.

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press .
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store the station by pressing and holding a preset number.

195

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

196 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.
Title
Select to display the information of
the current track/file.

Audio with Touch Screen
Features

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Random/Repeat
Select to use a random or repeat
feature.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
More
Select to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

196

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

197 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .

WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

Features

Folder Selection

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

File Selection

4. Rotate

to select a file, then press

Continued

197

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

198 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Audio with Touch Screen

Random/Repeat is selected.

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 196

Features

2. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 196

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

198

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

199 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 151
Audio/Information Screen

Album Art
Album Bar
Select to search for an album.

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.

Source
Select to change an audio source.
Album Art Icon

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.

Shuffle/Repeat
Select to use a shuffle or repeat
feature.

Features

Title
Select to display the information of
the current song.

Audio with Touch Screen

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Continued

199

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

200 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Features

200

Album Image

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

201 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .

Folder Selection
Features

File Selection

Continued

201

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

202 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes
when playing a file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .
Audio with Touch Screen

Features

1. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 199

2. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 199

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

202

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

203 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Rating Icon
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.

Title
Select to display the information of
the current song.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Features

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
Continued

203

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

204 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu *

1Playing Internet Radio

■ Operating a menu item
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select an item and press .

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora® Menu *
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 267
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.

204

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

205 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ AhaTM Radio Menu

1AhaTM Radio Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• 15sec Back
• Play/Pause
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• View text
• Change Source
• View list
• Dislike
• Sound

■ Operating a menu item

Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio * P. 269
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.

Features

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select an item and press .

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

* Not available on all models

205

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

206 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 151

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Title
Select to display the information of
the current file.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Scan
Select to use a scan feature.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
Random/Repeat
Select to use a random or
repeat feature.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

More
Select to display
the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

206

BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

207 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 270
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 266

Folder Selection

Features

File Selection

Continued

207

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

208 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Audio with Touch Screen

Random/Repeat is selected.

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 206

Features

2. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 206

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

208

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

209 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Pause Icon
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to
change files.
More
Select to display
the menu items.

Audio with Touch
Screen
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to change folder.

Features

Source
Select to change an
audio source.

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Title
Select to display
the information of
the current file.
Play Icon
Selector Knob
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
BACK Button
Press to go back to
the previous display.

Continued

209

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

210 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
Selector knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Play or Pause, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

210

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

211 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

Button

Interface Dial

These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate

to select.

Press

to enter.

Move

to select secondary menu.

Audio Menu Items
2 Sound P. 218
2 Refresh Station List P. 230
2 Save Preset P. 229, 234
2 Radio text P. 231
2 Music Search P. 236, 240, 250, 260
2 Scan P. 231, 237, 241, 261
2 Random/Repeat P. 237, 241, 251, 261

Features

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
available mode includes Sound, Change
Source, Refresh Station List, Save Preset,
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
Play modes can be also selected from Scan,
Random/Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

Voice Control System
The audio system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual for details.

211

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

212 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

icons to turn the page.

1Selecting an Audio Source
You can change the order of source icons displayed.

Features

Source List Icons

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Select More to display the menu items.

212

Menu Items
1. Select Source,
, then Edit Order.
2. Select two icons, then select Done.
The locations of these icons are switched.
To go back to the original display order, select Default.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

213 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

■ Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.

Features

■ Changing the Screen Settings

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 218

213

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

214 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

1Switching the Display
You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and
INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button
Features

214

Audio

Navigation

Info

Phone

Audio/Information Screen

PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

215 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 351
■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
Features

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Deleting the history manually
1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
Continued

215

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

216 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 151

Features

216

2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
5. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then press .
6. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
7. Move to select Add New, then press .
8. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
9. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

•
•

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

217 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

Features

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
9. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

217

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

218 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Sound, then press

MENU Button

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer

SVC

218

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

219 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Display tab.
4. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

219

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

220 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation

■ Voice Recognition

1Voice Recognition

Features

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control
system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
• Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

220

When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

221 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Portal Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
• Call Your contact name
• Call Phone Number
• Find nearest POI category name
• Go home
• Route menu
• Cancel route

■ Navigation Commands

■ On Screen Commands

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Info Commands

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Call by number
• Call by name
• Call Phone Number
• Call your contact name

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Trip computer
• Traffic information
• Display clock
• Display wallpaper

When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.

Features

■ Phone Commands

Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.

Continued

221

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

222 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Climate Control Commands

Features

222

The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
• Climate control automatic*1
• Climate control off*1
• Air conditioner on*1
• Air conditioner off*1
• Climate control defrost on*1
• Climate control defrost off*1
• Rear defrost on*1
• Rear defrost off*1
• Climate control fresh air
• Climate control recirculate
• Climate control vent
• Climate control bi-level
• Climate control floor
• Climate control floor and defrost
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
• Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
• Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Temperature up
• Temperature down

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Driver temperature up
Driver temperature down
Passenger temperature up
Passenger temperature down
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Driver temperature max heat
Driver temperature max cool
Passenger temperature max heat
Passenger temperature max cool
Climate control sync on*1
Climate control sync off*1

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

■ Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.

■ Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disk Drive or
iPod device using your voice.
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say: “Music search.”

■ Song By VoiceTM commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Music search
List album (specify album)
List artist (specify artist)
List composer (specify composer)
List genre (specify genre)
List playlist (specify playlist)
Play album (specify album)
Play artist (specify artist)
Play composer (specify composer)
Play genre (specify genre)
Play playlist (specify playlist)
Play song (specify song)
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

223 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Radio commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Hard Disk Drive play
Hard Disk Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Hard Disk Drive skip forward
Hard Disk Drive skip back
Hard Disk Drive album up*2
Hard Disk Drive album down*2
Hard Disk Drive track up
Hard Disk Drive track down
Hard Disk Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disk Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disk Drive track random*1
Hard Disk Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disk Drive track scan*1
Hard Disk Drive normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
*2: These commands are available only in
the corresponding playback mode.
For example, “Artist” commands are
available only in “Artist” mode.

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM
Radio select AM
Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station
Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
Radio scan*1
Radio select XM
XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
XM channel down
XM category up
XM category down
XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
XM scan*1
XM category mode
XM channel mode

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.

■ Disc commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Disc play
Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Disc skip forward
Disc skip back
Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up
Disc folder down
Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play

Features

■ HDD commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

Continued

223

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

224 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

■ iPod commands

■ USB commands

■ Bluetooth® Audio commands

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

iPod play
iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
iPod skip forward
iPod skip back
iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

224

USB play
USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
USB skip forward
USB skip back
USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up
USB folder down
USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play

*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

Bluetooth Audio play
Bluetooth Audio skip forward
Bluetooth Audio skip back
Bluetooth Audio group up
Bluetooth Audio group down
Bluetooth Audio pause
Bluetooth Audio resume
Bluetooth Audio track random
Bluetooth Audio track repeat

NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.

■ AUX commands
• Auxiliary play

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

225 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Pandora® commands *

■ AhaTM Radio commands

■ Internet service commands

The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
• Pandora play
• Pandora skip forward
• Pandora station up
• Pandora station down
• Pandora pause
• Pandora resume
• Pandora thumbs up
• Pandora thumbs down

The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
• Aha radio play
• Aha radio skip forward
• Aha radio skip back
• Aha radio station up
• Aha radio station down
• Aha radio resume
• Aha radio pause
• Aha radio like
• Aha radio dislike

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: The system accepts these commands
while the Internet service is playing.

Continued

Features

* Not available on all models

Internet service play
Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1

225

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

226 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Keyboard Entry Commands
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases
are:

Features

226

■ Letters
Say . . .
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

■ Numbers
Or say . . .
Apple/Alpha
Boy/Bravo
Charlie
Dog/Delta
Edward/Echo
Frank/Foxtrot
George/Golf
Henry/Hotel
Igloo/India
John/Juliet
King/Kilo
Larry/Lima
Mary/Mike
Nancy/November
Oscar
Paul/Papa
Queen/Quebec
Robert/Romeo
Sam/Sierra
Tom/Tango
Uncle/Uniform
Victor
William/Whiskey
X-ray
Yellow/Yankee
Zebra/Zulu

Number . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Or say . . .
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

227 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Symbols
Or say . . .
Hyphen
Exclamation point
Double Quote
Pound
Dollar
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Open Parenthesis
Close Parenthesis
Tilde
Slash
Less than
Greater than
Open Brace
Close Brace

Symbol . . .
À
Â
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Î
Ï
Ô
Ù
Û
Ü

Or say . . .
A grave
A circumflex
A umlaut
C cedilla
E grave
E acute
E circumflex
E umlaut
I grave
I circumflex
I umlaut
O circumflex
U grave
U circumflex
U umlaut

■ Punctuation marks
Symbol . . .
@
^
*
_
`
,
.
?
:
;
+

Or say . . .
At Sign
Caret
Asterisk
Underscore
Back Quote
Comma
Dot
Question mark
Colon
Semicolon
Plus

Features

Symbol . . .
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
~
/
<
>
{
}

■ Accented letters

227

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

228 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Presets
Select to store a station.

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.
Title
Select to display the information of
the current station.
Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a station
with a strong signal.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

228

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

229 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
Audio with Touch Screen

Continued

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store the station by pressing and holding a preset number.

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

229

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

230 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Move
tab.
2. Rotate
.

to select the Station List

to select the station, then press

Features

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Refresh Station List, then press .

230

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

231 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 228

To turn off scan, select Stop Scan.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

231

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

232 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Playing SiriusXM® Radio
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Features

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Presets
Select to store a station.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

232

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an SiriusXM® Radio category.
Title
Select to display the information of
the current station.
Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous or
next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

233 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ To Play the SiriusXM® Radio

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can control the SiriusXM® radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220

1. Select the SiriusXM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 155
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 212

In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
5. Rotate
to select Channel List, then press .
6. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press .

Audio with Touch Screen

Continued

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

233

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

234 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
Audio with Touch Screen

Features

234

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store the station by pressing and holding a preset number.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can store 12 SiriusXM® stations into the preset
memory.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

235 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Random/Repeat
Select to use a random or repeat feature.

Title
Select to display the information of
the current track/file.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to select
secondary menu.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

235

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

236 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD
NOTICE

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

Features

Folder Selection

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

File Selection

236

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

237 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 235

Random/Repeat is selected.

2. Select a mode.

Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Features

■ To turn off a play mode

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 235

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

237

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

238 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.

Audio with Touch Screen

Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next playlist/
album, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous playlist/
album.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Title
Select to display the information of
the current track.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Random/Repeat
Select to use a random or repeat feature.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

238

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
SETTINGS Button
Press to go the Settings menu screen.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

239 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

When Recording from CD is set to Auto, the songs on music CDs are automatically
recorded to the HDD the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs
directly from the HDD.
2 Customized Features P. 274

You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 242
2 Editing Track Information P. 245

Recording Indicator

If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Recording

Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.

Ready to record

Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

■ Stop Recording
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press

Features

You can play music from other sources (e.g.,
SiriusXM®, HDD, etc.) while recording.

Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting All HDD Data P. 311

■ Recording a CD Manually
When Recording from CD is set to Manual, the songs on music CDs can be
manually recorded to the HDD.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Rec to HDD, then press .

Continued

239

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

240 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

Features

240

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the Music Search list.
u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.

1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 252
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 265

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

241 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
P. 238

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode

Features

2. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.

Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 238

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Continued

241

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

242 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Editing an Album or Playlist

1Editing an Album or Playlist

Features

Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■ Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit an album name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete an album:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.

.
Icon

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 245

Select

242

to enter symbols.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

243 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

To delete a playlist:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Features

■ Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 245

Continued

243

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

244 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Creating a new playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen, then select
tracks from the Music Search list.
Features

244

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

245 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Editing Track Information

To delete a track:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Features

Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Tracks, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. To edit track information:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the audio with
touch screen. Move , rotate
to
select OK, then press .

Continued

245

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

246 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Displaying Music Information

Features

246

Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
4. Rotate
to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Edit name, then press
.
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
u The system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

247 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

■ Updating Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:
• Consult a dealer.
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.
• Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.

Features

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select the CD/HDD tab.
5. Rotate
to select Update Gracenote
Album Info, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Update by USB or
Update by CD, then press .
u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press
to finish.

1Updating Gracenote® Album Info

247

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

248 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 151

Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
Title
Select to display the information of
the current song.

Album Art Icon
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Shuffle/Repeat
Select to use a shuffle or repeat feature.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

248

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

249 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Album Image

Features

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

Continued

249

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

250 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
You can control an iPod using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 252
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 266

Features

250

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to select a song from the Music Search list.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

251 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes
when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

1. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 248

2. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 248

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

251

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

252 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod using voice commands.

Setting options:

■ To enable SBV

• On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Song by Voice, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Features

252

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

available.

• Off: Disable the feature.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

253 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Searching for music using SBV

1Searching for music using SBV

Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.

Continued

Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 222
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 254
Features

1. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod.
2. Press the
button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
3. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.

253

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

254 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Phonetic Modification

Features

254

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press .
5. Move and rotate
to select New
Modification, then press .
6. Rotate
to select HDD or iPod, then
press .

1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

255 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

7. Rotate
to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
8. Rotate
to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u To listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select Play,
then press .
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select
Delete, then press .
9. Rotate
to select Modify, then press
.
10. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
11. Move to select OK to exit.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”

255

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

256 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Compatible phones only

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

Audio/Information Screen
Features

Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press to set
your selection. Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

256

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is connected.
Rating Icon
Title
Select to display the information of the
current song.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

257 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ Pandora® Menu *

1Playing Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Skip Forward
• Bookmark This Song
• Play/Pause
• Bookmark This Artist
• Station List
• Change Source
• Like (Thumbs-up)
• Sound
• Dislike (Thumbs-down)

■ Operating a menu item

To select Change Source or Sound, press the
MENU button, rotate
to select an item,
then press .

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.

Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .

1Pandora® Menu *
You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 267
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.

* Not available on all models

Continued

257

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

258 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

■ AhaTM Radio Menu

1AhaTM Radio Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• View text
• Dislike
• View list
• Play/Pause
• Reply
• 15sec Back
• Change Source
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• Sound

■ Operating a menu item
Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To select Sound, Change Source or
Stations, press the MENU button, rotate
to select an item, then press .

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio * P. 269
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

258

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

259 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 151
Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Random/Repeat
Select to use a random or repeat feature.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
Title
Select to display the information of
the current file.

Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on and off.

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.

Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

259

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

260 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 270
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

Folder Selection
Features

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

File Selection

260

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 266

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

261 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 259

Random/Repeat is selected.

2. Select a mode.

Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

Features

■ To turn off a play mode

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 259

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

261

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

262 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume)
Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Pause Icon
Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
Move up, down,
right and left to
select secondary
menu.

262

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Title
Select to display
the information of
the current file.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folders.
Play Icon
More
Select to display
the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 220

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

263 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press

The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

263

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

264 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject

Cause
Track/file format not supported

Mechanical error

●

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.

●

Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.

●

2 Protecting CDs P. 272

Mecha Error
Features

264

Solution

●

Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

Servo error

Check Disc

Disc error

Heat Error

High temperature

●

If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 272

●

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

265 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio

Models with navigation system

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer.

Solution
—
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.

The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.

Unplayable File

Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.

Features

The navigation system temperature is too high. For
protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.

265

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

266 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution

Features

USB Error

Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB flash drive

No Data

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported

266

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

267 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

U.S. models

Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Solution
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Audio/Information Screen

There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.

No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
skip each hour.
predetermined number of times in an hour.

Continued

267

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

268 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

Error Message

Features

268

Solution

Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

No data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your
mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

269 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM Radio *

AhaTM Radio *
If an error occurs while playing AhaTM Radio, you may see the following error
messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution

Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your
mobile device.

Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Features

* Not available on all models

269

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

270 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob or the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the
SiriusXM® website to subscribe.

■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button, or through the audio
with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is
activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Features

270

■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Loading:
SiriusXM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Check antenna:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

* Not available on all models

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800)
852-9696
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
(877) 209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

271 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs

Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Also includes:

Features

■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Continued

271

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

272 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs
NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

Features

●

Using
Printer Label
Kit

Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs

Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs

3-inch
(8-cm)
CD

272

With Label/
Sticker

Warped

Burrs

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

273 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

Features

Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S*2

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

*1:Models with one display
*2:Models with two displays or the navigation system

■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•

Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

273

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

274 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

Models without navigation system

■ How to customize

Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Shift to (P .

Models with one display

While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w *1, press the
SETTINGS button, rotate
to select a setting item, and press .
Audio/Information Screen

Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate
, and press
2 List of customizable options P. 281

Features
SETTINGS Button

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

275 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with two displays

While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press and hold
the DISP button, rotate
to select a setting item, and press .
Audio/Information Screen

Features

DISP Button

Continued

275

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

276 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models without navigation system

■ Customization flow
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level

Display

Models with one display

Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

Press and hold the DISP button.

Beep
Bluetooth
System
Settings

Voice
Recog

Features

Clock

Others

Default

276

Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Voice Prompt
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Language
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory Data Reset

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

277 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Meter
Setup

Lighting
Setup

Door
Setup

Maintenance Info.
Default

* Not available on all models

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens *
*
Memory Position Link
Driving Position Setup
Keyless
Door Unlock Mode
Access
Setup *
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset

Continued

277

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

278 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Sound*1
Source Select Popup
Cover Art*2
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device*2
Bluetooth Device List*2

Audio
Settings
Default

Features

Info
Settings

Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Default

*1: Models with one display
*2: May change depending on your currently selected source.

278

Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

279 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Connect
Phone

Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect

Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Settings

Phone

Features

Text
Message*1,
Text/Email*2

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo*2
Enable Text Message*1,
Enable Text/Email*2
Select Account*2
New Text Message Alert*1,
New Text/Email Alert*2
Message Auto Reading

Default

*1: Models with one display
*2: Models with two displays
Continued

279

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

280 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

LaneWatch *

Camera
Settings
Features

Default

*1: Models with two displays

280

Rear
Camera

* Not available on all models

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default*1
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

281 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models without navigation system

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Selects whether a beeper sounds when you
operate the selector knob.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth On/Off

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

Beep

Bluetooth

—

2 Phone Setup P. 322

Edit Pairing Code
Voice
Recog

Features

System
Settings

Description

Voice Prompt

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 324

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Random/Fixed*1
Beginner*1/Expert

*1:Default Setting

Continued

281

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

282 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock Type
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock

Features

Others

Wallpaper

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Selectable Settings
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Add New

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 159, 185

Adjusts Clock.

—

2 Clock P. 86

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch
screen *.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Factory Data Reset
Default
*1:Default Setting

282

Changes the clock display type.
●

Clock Adjustment

System
Settings

Description

* Not available on all models

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 309

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

Yes/No
Yes/No

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

283 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance
Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.

On*1/Off

Meter
Setup

Driving
Position
Setup*

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Customizable Features

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

283

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

284 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Keyless
Access
Setup *

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Lighting
Setup

Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either door handle.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

284

Description

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

285 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P*2/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.

All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park*2/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance
Info.

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.

Auto Door Lock

Door
Setup

Description

—

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting
*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Continued

285

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

286 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound*2

Description

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 161

Selectable Settings
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble and SUBW *), -9
~ C*1 ~ +9 (Fader and
Balance), Off/Low/
Mid*1/High (SVC)

Models with one display

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on when the AUDIO button is pressed.
Features

Source Select Popup

On/Off*1

Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when Audio is selected on the
Function Change screen.

Audio
Settings
iPod, USB, Pandora® * or AhaTM* mode

Cover Art
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or AhaTM* mode

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or AhaTM* mode

Bluetooth Device List
Default
*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with one display

286

Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

Turns on and off the cover art display.

On*1/Off

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.

—

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

287 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Info
Settings

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock Type
Wallpaper
See System Settings on P. 281 to P. 282

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

Features

Default

Continued

287

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

288 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Connect Phone

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 322

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 322

Edit Speed Dial
Features

Phone
Settings

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo*2

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Phone

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays

288

—

2 Speed Dial P. 333

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

289 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Text/
Message*2,
Text/
Email*3

Description

Selectable Settings

Enable Text Message*2,
Enable Text/Email*3

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.

Select Account*3

Selects a text/e-mail message account.

New Text Message Alert*2,
New Text/Email Alert*3

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.

On/Off*1

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text/e-mail message.
● On- A text/e-mail message is always read
aloud.
● Off- A text/e-mail message is not read aloud.
● Auto- A text/e-mail message is read aloud only
when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

Default

On*1/Off
—

Features

Phone
Settings

Customizable Features

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with one display
*3:Models with two displays

Continued

289

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

290 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Brightness
LaneWatch *

Contrast

Features

Display

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Color
Camera
Settings

Tint

Rear
Camera

Default*2

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Yes/No

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.

Yes/No

Default
*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays

290

Black Level

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

291 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with navigation system

1How to customize

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the
SETTINGS button, rotate
to select a setting item, and press .

To customize other features, rotate
, move
or , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 298

Audio/Information Screen

Features

SETTINGS Button

Continued

291

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

292 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with navigation system

■ Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.

Display

System
Settings

Features

Default

Sound/
Beep

Bluetooth

Voice
Reco

292

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Guidance Volume
Interface Dial Feedback
Message Auto Reading
Verbal Reminder
Bluetooth Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Guidance Volume
Voice Prompt
Song by Voice
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

293 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper
Type

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Others

Features

* Not available on all models

Units
Language
Voice Command Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
System Device Information
Factory Data Reset

Continued

293

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

294 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup

Meter
Setup
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Default

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens

Driving Position Setup *
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup

Forward Collision
Warning Distance

Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Setup
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Reset

294

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

295 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

LaneWatch
Camera
Settings

Default

Rear
Camera

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Next Maneuver Pop up
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Features

Default
CD/HDD

Recording from CD*1
Recording Quality*1
HDD Info*1
Update Gracenote Album Info*1
Delete All HDD Data*1

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Device List*1
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device*1

Other

Source Select Popup
Cover Art*1

Audio
Settings

Default

*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
Continued

295

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

296 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Phone

Connect phone

Default

Bluetooth Device
List

Disconnect
Edit Bluetooth
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device

Phone
Settings

Features

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo

Default

Text/Email

Default

296

Add Bluetooth
Device

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

297 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Navi
Settings

See Navigation System Manual.

Clock

Info
Settings

Features

Others

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Info Screen Preference

Default

* Not available on all models

Continued

297

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

298 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with navigation system

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Features

System
Settings

Sound/
Beep

Bluetooth

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Guidance Volume

Changes the volume of the audio speakers.

—

Interface Dial Feedback

Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial.

On*1/Off/Auto

Message Auto Reading

Selects whether the system automatically read
out message, does not read, or read out only
when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Status

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

Edit Pairing Code
*1:Default Setting

298

—

2 Phone Setup P. 357

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 359

Random/Fixed*1

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

299 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Voice
Reco

Guidance Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 252

Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod.

Phonebook Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Adjustment

On*1/Off
On*1/Off

—

2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 372

Changes the clock display type.

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 216

Clock

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 254

●

Wallpaper

Selectable Settings

Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off

Features

System
Settings

Description

Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic

Adjusts Clock.

—

2 Clock P. 86

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Auto Time Zone *

Sets the navigation system to automatically
adjust the clock when driving through different
time zones.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

299

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

300 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.

Clock Reset

Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.

Units

Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.

mile*1/km (U.S.)
mile/km*1 (Canada)

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

System Device Information

Displays the system/Device information.

Features

Others

Factory Data Reset
Default
*1:Default Setting

300

Selectable Settings

Auto Daylight *
Clock

System
Settings

Description

* Not available on all models

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 310

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

On*1/Off
—

—
—
Default/OK

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

301 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A *, and
elapsed time A *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B *, and
elapsed time B *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance
Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup

Features

TPMS Calibration

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

301

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

302 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup*

Keyless
Access
Setup
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Lighting
Setup

Selectable Settings

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.

On*1/Off

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Drivers Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

302

Description

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

303 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.

All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance
Info.

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.

Auto Door Lock

Door
Setup

Description

—

Default/OK

*1:Default Setting

Continued

303

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

304 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Next Maneuver Pop up

Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch
display.

On*1/Off

Features

LaneWatch

Brightness
Contrast

Camera
Settings

Display

Black Level

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Color
Tint

Rear
Camera

*1:Default Setting

304

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Default/OK

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Default/OK

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

305 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
CD mode

Recording from CD
CD mode

Recording Quality
HDD mode

CD/HDD

HDD Info
CD or HDD mode

Audio
Settings

HDD mode

Delete All HDD Data
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or
AhaTM mode

Bluetooth Device List
Bluetooth

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or
AhaTM mode

Connect Bluetooth Audio
Device

Selectable Settings

Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD.

Auto/Manual*1

Selects the quality of the music files recorded
to the HDD.

Standard*1/High

Displays the HDD capacity.
Updates the Gracenote® Album Info
(Gracenote® Media Database).
2 Deleting All HDD Data P. 311

—
Update by USB*1/
Update by CD

Features

Update Gracenote Album
Info

Description

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device
paired to HFL.

—

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

305

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

306 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Source Select Popup

Audio
Settings

Other

CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod, USB,
Pandora® * or AhaTM mode

Description

Selectable Settings

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on when the AUDIO button is pressed.

On/Off*1

Turns on and off the cover art display.

On*1/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

Cover Art
Default

Features

Connect phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 357

Phone
Settings

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 357

Edit Speed Dial
*1:Default Setting

306

* Not available on all models

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Phone Setup P. 357

—

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

307 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Phone

Text/
Email

Default

Selectable Settings

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.

On*1/Off

Select Account

Selects a text/e-mail message account.

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.

On/Off*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

Features

Phone
Settings

Description

—

*1:Default Setting

Continued

307

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

308 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock

Clock Format

See System Settings on P. 298 to P. 300.

Auto Time Zone *
Features

Auto Daylight *
Info
Settings

Clock Reset

Others

Info Screen Preference

Default
*1:Default Setting

308

* Not available on all models

Selects any of the following to be displayed when
you press the INFO button.
● Info Top: Some of the available menu items
pop up.
● Info Menu: All available menu items pop up.
● Off: The menu item you selected last time is
displayed.

Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

309 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Models without navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
Models with one display

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

Features

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to
reset the settings.
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

The following settings will be reset:
• Audio preset settings
• Phonebook entries
• Other display and each item settings.

309

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

310 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Models with navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings

Features

310

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate
to select Factory Data Reset,
then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
• Route Preference
• Audio preset settings
• Phonebook entries
• Other display and each item settings.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

311 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting All HDD Data

Models with navigation system

Deleting All HDD Data
Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select the CD/HDD tab.
5. Rotate
to select Delete All HDD Data,
then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
Features

311

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

312 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.

■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.

Training HomeLink
Red Indicator

312

* Not available on all models

If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

313 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

■ Training a Button

1Training HomeLink

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?

YES

Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

NO
Standard transmitter

YES

a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

Rolling code transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”

NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Training
Complete

Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.

Features

3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?

HomeLink LED
is on.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).

Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

313

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

314 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models without navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528 -7876.

Models with one display

To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 274

Volume up

Features

Microphone
Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

PHONE
Button
Selector
Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .

314

Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

315 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

Models with two displays

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Volume up

Pick-up
Button

Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

DISP
Button
Selector
Knob

Features

(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to
answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .
To go to the Phone screen:
1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .

Continued

315

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

316 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Features

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Options

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 333

316

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

317 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

■ Phone Settings screen
Models with one display

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Models with two displays

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Bluetooth
Device List

(Existing
entry list)

Add
Bluetooth
Device

Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit PIN
Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Features

Connect
Phone*2

Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
Continued

317

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

318 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a
New Entry

speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Import from
Call History

Edit
Phone

Edit Speed
Dial*1

●

Delete
Features

Delete All
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync*1
Use Contact Photo*2

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with two displays

318

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●

(Existing
entry list)

Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

319 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Text Message
Text/Email*1, *3

*1, *2

Select Account *
New Text Message Alert
New Text/Email Alert*3
Message Auto Reading

Default

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Enable Text Message*2
Enable Text/Email*3

Select a text/e-mail message account.
*2

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.
Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text/e-mail
message.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Features

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with one display
*3: Models with two displays
* Not available on all models

Continued

319

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

320 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone screen
Models with one display

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with two displays

1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
Dial*1
Redial*1
Features

Call
History*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Dialed
Received
Missed

Speed Dial*1

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.

New Entry

Manual Input
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook

(Existing entry list)
More Speed Dials

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

320

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

321 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook*1
Text Message*1, *2
Text/Email*1, *3

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Select Account *

Select a text/e-mail message account.

Read/Stop

Select a message
and press .

Previous Message
Next Message
Reply
Call

See the previous message.
See the next message.
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.

Features

Message is read
aloud.

System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.

Make a call to the sender.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with one display
*3: Models with two displays
* Not available on all models

Continued

321

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

322 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320

Features

322

2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 332

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

323 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

Continued

Features

2. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

323

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

324 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
Models with one display

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

Edit Pairing Code

Features

324

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

325 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

Continued

Features

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

325

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

326 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

Features

326

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

327 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up a Text/E-Mail Message Options
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317
Models with one display

2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Features

Models with two displays

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
All models

3. Rotate
.

to select On or Off, then press

Continued

327

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

328 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message notice
Models with one display

1. On the Text Message screen, rotate
to
select New Text Message Alert, then
press .

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

Models with two displays

1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate
to
select New Text/Email Alert, then press
.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Features

All models

2. Rotate
.

to select On or Off, then press

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email
screen, rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto then
press .

328

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text/e-mail message is always read aloud.
Off: A text/e-mail message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text/e-mail message is read aloud only when
driving.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

329 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Edit PIN, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
Features

Audio/information screen

u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Press
to delete. Press OK to enter the
security PIN.
u Audio with touch screen *
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.

Audio with touch screen *

* Not available on all models

Continued

329

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

330 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .

330

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

331 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

Features

Models with two displays

■ Use Contact Photo
You can display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Use
Contact Photo.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Continued

331

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

332 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.

When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.

Features

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Pager

setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

Voice

2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

332

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

333 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone screen.
Mr.AAA

111AAA####

Mr.BBB

222BBB####

Mr.CCC

333CCC####

Mr.DDD

444DDD####

Mr.EEE

555EEE####

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate
to
select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
Continued

Features

Select a method to store

2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

333

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

334 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

Features

334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

335 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

Features

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Continued

335

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

336 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the
phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice
tag.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

Features

336

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

337 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Models with two displays

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 316
2 Speed Dial P. 333
Models with two displays

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.

Features

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press
.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

337

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

338 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number

1To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Models with two displays

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.

Features

■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

338

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

339 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history
Audio/information screen

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Continued

Features

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

339

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

340 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Audio with touch screen *

You can dial the last six numbers in the call
history.
1. Select
.
2. Select Call History.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Features

340

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

341 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
Audio/information screen

Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.

1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 333

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

You can dial the first six numbers in the speed
dial entries ( - ).
1. Select
.
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the
corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.

Features

Models with one display

Audio with touch screen *

* Not available on all models

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

341

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

342 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the
Press the

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
Models with two displays

Features

342

You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen instead of the
and
buttons.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

343 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
Models with two displays

You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.

Models with one display

Pres the MENU button to display the options.
Models with two displays

The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.

Continued

Features

All models

Rotate
to select the mute option, then
press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

343

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

344 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text/E-Mail Message
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text/e-mail messages.

Models with two displays

HFL can also display e-mail messages.

Features

344

1Receiving a Text/E-Mail Message

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text/e-mail message.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text/e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text/e-mail message for the first
time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked
to turn the New Text Message Alert or the New
Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail message
notice P. 328

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

345 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Models with two displays

1Selecting a Mail Account

■ Selecting a Mail Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 317

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Rotate
to select Select Account on the top of the
list, then press .
Message List

Features

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an
e-mail account you want, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Continued

345

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

346 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone screen P. 320
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with one display

2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
Features

Text Message

Models with two displays

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
All models

3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

346

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, press
on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

347 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

■ Displaying e-mail messages

1Displaying e-mail messages

Models with two displays

Received text/e-mail messages may appear in the
message list screen at the same time. In this case, text
messages are titled No Subject.

1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 320

Message List

Features

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate
to select a folder, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

E-mail

Continued

347

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

348 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 346

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Stop or Read, then
press .

Features

348

1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to:
• Stop while the text/e-mail message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read
out.
• Read when the system has finished reading out the
text/e-mail message, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

349 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 346

Continued

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Features

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Reply, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

349

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

350 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying text messages P. 346

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Call, then press .

Features

350

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

351 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

Volume up
Microphone

Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

PHONE
Button
Interface
Dial

(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press . Move
, or to select secondary menu.

Features

Pick-up
Button

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Continued

If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.

351

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

352 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number

HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

Features

1HFL Status Display

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Option

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 369

352

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

353 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.

1HFL Menus

■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect

Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit Device
Name

(Existing
entry list)
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth
Device

Edit the user name of a paired phone.

Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Edit PIN

Features

Phone

Connect
phone*1

Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
Continued

353

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

354 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Delete All

Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.

Edit Speed
Dial*1

New Entry

Import from Select a phone number from the call
Call History history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit

(Existing
entry list)

●
●

Delete
Features

Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
Use Contact Photo
Default
Enable Text/Email
Text/Email

Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

354

HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a text/e-mail message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
text/e-mail message.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

355 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

Dial*1

Features

Phonebook*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Manual Input
New Entry

Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook

Speed Dial*1

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

More Speed Dials

Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued

355

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

356 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All

Call History*1

Dialed
Received
Missed

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Read/Stop)

Features

Select a message
and press .
Message is
read aloud.
Text/Email*1

System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.
See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Call

Make a call to the sender.

Select Account Select a text/e-mail message account.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

356

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

357 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no

Continued

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 368

357

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

358 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

Features

358

already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

359 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Bluetooth tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Pairing Code,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

Features

Continued

359

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

360 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To replace an already-paired phone

Features

360

with a new phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
7. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

361 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

361

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

362 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up a Text/E-Mail Message Options
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail

Features

message function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Enable Text/Email,
then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message notice
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select New Text/Email
Alert, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

362

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

363 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Sound/Beep
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text/e-mail message is always read aloud.
Off: A text/e-mail message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text/e-mail message is read aloud only when
driving.

Features

Continued

363

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

364 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Create a Security PIN

Features

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Edit PIN, then press .
7. Enter a new four-digit number.
Audio/information screen

Audio with touch screen

364

1To Create a Security PIN

u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
to select
OK to enter the security PIN.
u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
8. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

365 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Editing User Name
Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
7. Enter a new name of the phone.

Audio/information screen

Icon

Select

to enter symbols.

Features

Audio/information screen

1Editing User Name

u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
or move
to select OK then press
to enter the
name.
Audio with touch screen

u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a name using the
icons.

Continued

365

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

366 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Auto Transfer, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On, then press .
Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Auto Answer, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On, then press .

366

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

367 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Ring Tone, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

You can display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Use Contact Photo,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

Continued

Features

■ Use Contact Photo

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

367

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

368 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
Features

368

setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Automatic Phone
Sync, then press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Pager

Voice
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

369 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Continued

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate
to
select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

369

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

370 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed

Features

370

dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
7. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

371 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Continued

371

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

372 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

■ To add a new voice tag

Features

372

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

373 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

6. Rotate
to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
7. Move
or
and rotate
to select a
contact name, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
9. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
10.You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
Features

Continued

373

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

374 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To modify a voice tag

Features

374

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
6. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
8. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

375 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
6. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
8. Move and rotate
to select OK, then
press .

375

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

376 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete all modified voice tags
Connect phone

Phone#1
Phone#2
Phone#3

Connect phone

Features

376

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
u The contact name list appears.
6. Move and rotate
to select Delete All,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

377 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Continued

377

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

378 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

Features

378

phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
u You can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 352
2 Speed Dial P. 369
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

379 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

Features

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

379

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

380 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
Features

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 369

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

380

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

381 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the
Press the

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.

Continued

381

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

382 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

Features

382

The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
Mute Icon
screen.
Rotate
to select the mute option, then
press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

383 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text/E-Mail Message

1Receiving a Text/E-Mail Message

Continued

The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text/e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text/e-mail message for the first
time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked
to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail message
notice P. 362

Features

HFL can display newly received text/e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text/e-mail message.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text/e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.

383

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

384 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account

Features

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Select Account, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select Text message or an
e-mail account you want, then press .

1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

384

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

385 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

Continued

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, move
on the text message screen.

Features

Text Message

1Displaying Messages

385

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

386 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

Message List
Features
E-mail

386

■ Displaying e-mail messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a folder, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

1Displaying e-mail messages
Received text/e-mail messages may appear in the
message list screen at the same time. In this case, text
messages are titled No subject.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

387 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 385

2. Press
to stop reading.
Press
again to start reading the message
from the beginning.

2 Displaying Messages P. 385

2. Move and rotate
to select Reply,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No

Features

■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

387

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

388 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
John 0123456789####

Features

388

2 Displaying text messages P. 385
Call

2. Move
press

and rotate
.

to select Call, then

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

389 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Compass *
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass
display appears.

Compass Calibration

* Not available on all models

Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, press the BACK button to
cancel the setting mode and return to the previous
screen.

Features

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then press
.
4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

1Compass *

389

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

390 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for five seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Zone Adjust, then
press .
u The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
Features

Zone Map

15
14

3
4

12
5

Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11

390

7 8

10 11

1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

391 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 392
Maximum Load Limit........................ 395
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 397
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 399
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 400
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 401, 403
Precautions While Driving................. 407
Automatic Transmission/CVT * .......... 408
Shifting ............................ 409, 413, 417
ECON Button ................................... 420

* Not available on all models

Cruise Control ................................. 421
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * .... 424
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * ..... 428
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 432
LaneWatchTM *.......................................... 434
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 436

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 438
Braking
Brake System ................................... 440
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 442

Brake Assist System ......................... 443
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 444
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 445
Rearview Camera ............................. 446
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 447
How to Refuel ................................. 448
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 449
Accessories and Modifications ........ 450

391

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

392 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving

392

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

393 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 395

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 96

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Driving

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 127
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 130

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 125
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 124

Continued

393

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

394 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 68

Driving

394

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

395 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

Continued

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 530, 532

Driving

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 530, 532

395

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

396 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

396

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

397 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
■ Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load

Continued

Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).

Driving

Tongue Load
Load
Tongue

■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.

3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 530, 532

397

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

398 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.

■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■ Trailer brakes

Driving

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

398

1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

399 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving Safely with a Trailer
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

2 Towing Load Limits P. 397

• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

■ Towing Speeds and Gears
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Driving

Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

■ Turning and Braking
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.

Continued

399

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

400 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool
down the engine if necessary.
Automatic transmission models

• Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 527

Driving

400

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

401 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

Driving

Brake Pedal

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.

Brake Pedal

Continued

401

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

402 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 103

Driving

2 Parking Brake P. 440

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.

402

1Starting the Engine

1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

403 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

Driving

Brake Pedal

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 103

Brake Pedal

Continued

403

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

404 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

All models

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 512
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.

Driving

404

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

405 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models

• If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.

■ Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission/CVT models

2 Parking Brake P. 440

Driving

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

Continued

405

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

406 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.

Driving

406

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

407 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Driving

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.

407

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

408 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT *

Automatic Transmission/CVT *
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Driving

408

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

409 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing

When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.

Neutral
Used when idling

Driving

Drive
Used:
● For normal driving
● When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
Release Button

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
● When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

Continued

409

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

410 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator

Driving

410

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

411 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.

The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.

Driving

■ When the shift lever is in (S :

To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
Continued

411

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

412 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel
efficiency and reduce emissions.

Driving

412

Shift Up
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
6 to 7

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)

Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
52 mph (84 km/h)
57 mph (92 km/h)

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

413 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Automatic transmission models

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.

Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for:
● Normal driving (gears change between
1st and 6th automatically)
● Temporally driving in the sequential
mode

Driving

Release Button

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Drive (S)
● Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at
high speed)
● Used when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain
● Used for driving in the sequential mode

Continued

413

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

414 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (Sequential Shift Mode)
Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

Driving

414

Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

415 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Sequential Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift
mode.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.

Driving

■ When the shift lever is in (S :

If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission
automatically shift up to 2nd gear. It does not shift automatically from 2nd through
6th gears.
You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.
When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D .
When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position
indicator go off.

Continued

415

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

416 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever
from (S to (D .

■ Sequential Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation

(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)

Driving

Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel
efficiency and reduce emissions.
Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to a lower gear)

416

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gear continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to a higher gear)

Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot
shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed
is not in its allowable gear shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

417 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models

Shifting

1Shifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.

Continued

Driving

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.

417

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

418 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
4-cylinder models

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration
17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (46 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)

6-cylinder models

Driving

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration
17 mph (28 km/h)
27 mph (44 km/h)
36 mph (58 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
44 mph (71 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.

418

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

419 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Driving

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

419

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

420 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel
economy by adjusting the performance of the
engine, transmission, climate control system,
and cruise control.

Driving

420

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

421 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Automatic transmission/CVT models

■ Shift positions for cruise control:

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

In (D or (S

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.

the steering wheel.

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

Driving

■ Press the CRUISE button on

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

1Cruise Control

Manual transmission models

When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.

Continued

421

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

422 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button

Press and release

On when cruise control begins

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
Driving

422

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

423 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

1To Cancel

■ To Cancel
CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

423

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

424 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Alerts you when it determines that there is a possibility that your vehicle may collide
with a vehicle detected in front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts,
including a head-up warning that flashes on the windshield.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).

■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
LONG
NORMAL
Driving

SHORT

Your Vehicle

424

* Not available on all models

Vehicle Ahead

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 274
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 429

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

425 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Camera-based system
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.

Head-up Warning Lights
Flash twice.

Beep

The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator blinks
until a possible collision
is avoided.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.

The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Driving

1How the system works

Lens

* Not available on all models

Continued

425

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

426 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.

Driving

426

1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a
reflective shade, do not allow it to cover the camera
housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat
on the camera.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

427 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may
activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no
vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●

●

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

Driving

●

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a
tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly detect a vehicle in front
of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned
out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

427

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

428 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over detected side lane markings.

■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.

Driving

428

* Not available on all models

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

429 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ How the System Activates

1How the System Activates

The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are
met:
• The vehicle is traveling between 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

■ LDW Camera
LDW Camera

LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 76

1LDW Camera

The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

Driving

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Continued

429

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

430 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ LDW On and Off
LDW Button
Indicator

Driving

430

1LDW Camera

Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a
reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

431 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●

●
●
●
●

Driving

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.
When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
When the road has many repaired areas or erased lines.
When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markings.

431

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

432 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

Driving

432

VSA® System
Indicator

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

433 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF
Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.

(VSA® OFF)

VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.

Driving

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the

button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

433

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

434 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

LaneWatchTM *
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1 The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.

Press the LaneWatch
button.

Driving

Press the LaneWatch
button again.

Audio/Information Screen

* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.

434

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.

1LaneWatchTM *

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

Camera

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
• Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

435 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 274

■ Reference Lines

2
1

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
For proper LaneWatch operation:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens
is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth
to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

Driving

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

1LaneWatchTM *

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

435

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

436 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come.

■ TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
Driving

2 Checking Tires P. 485

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
Manual transmission models

• The shift lever is in (N .
Automatic transmission/CVT models

• The shift lever is in (P .
All models

• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

436

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

437 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator

TPMS
Button

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.

1TPMS Calibration

• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.

• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• During this period, if the ignition is turned on and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 274

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

437

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

438 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.

438

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

439 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Driving

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

439

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

440 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.

Driving

440

To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

441 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 443
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 442

1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Driving

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

441

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

442 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”

■ ABS operation

Driving

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

442

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

443 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving

443

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

444 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
Manual transmission models

3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1 .
All models

4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

Driving

444

1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
Automatic transmission/CVT models

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

445 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with two displays/Models with navigation system

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines

Bumper

Normal View Mode

Camera

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Top Down View Mode

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 274

Driving

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.

Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.

445

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

446 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Rearview Camera
Models with one display

About Your Rearview Camera

1About Your Rearview Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R .

■ Rearview Camera Display Area
Guidelines

Bumper

Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Driving

Camera
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.

446

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

447 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.

1Fuel Information

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)

447

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

448 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.

Push

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

Driving

Cap
Cap

Holder

448

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

449 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Driving

449

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

450 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 524

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Driving

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.

450

1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

451 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 452
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 453

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 454
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 455
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 459

Opening the Hood ........................... 461
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 463
Oil Check ......................................... 464
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 466
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 467

Engine Coolant ................................ 469
Transmission Fluid............................ 471
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 473
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 474
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 475

Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 483
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 485
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 486

Tire Labeling .................................... 486

Tire Service Life................................ 490
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 491
Tire Rotation.................................... 492
Winter Tires ..................................... 493
Battery............................................... 494
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 495
Climate Control System Maintenance...497
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 498
Exterior Care.................................... 500

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......488

Wear Indicators................................ 490

451

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

452 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 473

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485
Maintenance

452

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 457
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 541

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

453 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

453

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

454 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance

454

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

455 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

Maintenance

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

455

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

456 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

(Select/Reset) knob.
Explanation

Information

The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.

The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Maintenance Minder Indicator

Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached
It goes off when the display is
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
switched.
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.

Maintenance

456

Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

457 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
Minder Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Minder
Message

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main Item

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●
●

●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4,*5
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*6,*7
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*6: 6-cylinder models
*7: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under
-20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

Continued

Maintenance

●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#

Sub Items

457

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

458 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(Select/Reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.

Maintenance
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

458

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 274

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

459 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
4-cylinder models

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Manual transmission
models

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Battery

Maintenance

Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Continued

459

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

460 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Manual transmission
models

Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Battery
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Maintenance
Radiator Cap

460

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

461 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.

Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Lever

Grip

Clamp

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

Support Rod

When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
Continued

461

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

462 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

6-cylinder models

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.

Maintenance

462

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

463 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

463

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

464 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
4-cylinder models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

6-cylinder models

Maintenance

464

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

465 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
6-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Maintenance

465

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

466 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

4-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Maintenance

466

1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

467 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
4-cylinder models
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
Washer
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

6-cylinder models

Washer
Maintenance

Drain Bolt

Continued

467

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

468 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

4-cylinder models

Oil Filter

6-cylinder models

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
4-cylinder models

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
6-cylinder models

Oil Filter
Maintenance

468

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
6-cylinder models

4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

469 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
1Engine Coolant

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

■ Reserve Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.

Reserve
Tank

MAX
MIN

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

Continued

Maintenance

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

469

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

470 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

■ Radiator

1Radiator

Radiator Cap

Maintenance

470

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

471 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
4-cylinder models with continuously variable transmission (CVT)

■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE

Specified fluid: HCF-2

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle warranty.

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission

■ Manual Transmission Fluid

1Manual Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Continued

Maintenance

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.

Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

471

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

472 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

6-cylinder models with automatic transmission

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Maintenance

472

1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

473 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid

Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

■ Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir

The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

MAX

1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

MIN

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
1Checking the Clutch Fluid

■ Checking the Clutch Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Clutch Reservoir

If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Manual transmission models

MAX
MIN

473

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

474 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance

474

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

475 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Headlight Bulbs

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: LED type *
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) *

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.

■ High Beam Headlight
Holding Clip

Driver side
6-cylinder models

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct and the air
intake tube.
Tube

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Holding Clips
Passenger side

Maintenance

All models

1. Remove the reserve tank.

* Not available on all models

Continued

475

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

476 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

Bulb

Coupler

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

1High Beam Headlight
Holding clip

Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.

Tab

Center pin
Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until
it is flat.

Maintenance

476

Push until
the pin is
flat.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

477 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

■ Low Beam Headlights

1Low Beam Headlights

Models with halogen low beam headlights

Bulb

Coupler

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Models with LED low beam headlights

Low beam headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.

Tab

Maintenance

477

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

478 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

Fog Light Bulbs *
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)
1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.

Screw

1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Bulb
Tab

Maintenance

478

Coupler

* Not available on all models

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

479 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.

Holding Clip

Screw

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs *

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Center pin

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Push until the
pin is flat.

Maintenance

Socket

1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models

479

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

480 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Parking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs
Parking/daytime running light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Models with bulb type parking lights

Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Parking Light: 5 W
Bulb

Tab

Driver side

1. Remove the upper part of the air intake
duct and the air intake tube.
2 High Beam Headlight P. 475
Passenger side

Coupler
Maintenance

480

Socket

1. Remove the engine coolant reserve tank.
2 High Beam Headlight P. 475
Both sides

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

481 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal
Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Light: 3CP
Cargo Hook

1Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear
Side Marker Light Bulbs
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.

Clip

1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the
tabs on both sides.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Tabs

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.

Holding Clip

Push until the
pin is flat.

Maintenance

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb
Socket

481

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

482 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its
left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Lens

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Maintenance

Bulb

High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light bulbs are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

482

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

483 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.

Tab

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade
from the wiper arm.

Maintenance

Continued

483

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

484 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

Top
Retainer
Blade

Maintenance

Indent

Tab

484

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

485 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.

3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 436

Maintenance

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

1Checking Tires

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.

2 Wear Indicators P. 490

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

485

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

486 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Tire Labeling
Example

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

486

1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

487 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

487

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

488 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Maintenance

488

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

489 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Maintenance

■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

1Traction

489

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

490 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size
Pressure

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

Maintenance

490

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

215/55R17 94V
235/45R18 94V
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

491 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA®)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

491

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

492 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display
helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

FRONT
Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Maintenance

492

Front

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 436

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

493 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R17 tires

Models with 235/45R18 tires

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

Maintenance

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036

1Winter Tires

493

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

494 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on the information display will let
you know. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 153

• The clock resets.

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

2 Clock P. 86

• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Maintenance

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.

494

* Not available on all models

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

495 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

NOTICE

■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.

Battery

1Replacing the Button Battery

Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

495

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

496 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

Maintenance

496

* Not available on all models

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

497 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

497

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

498 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Opening
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

Maintenance

498

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

499 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats
Front (driver side)

Unlock

Lock

Rear (passenger side)

1Floor Mats

The floor mats for the driver, and the rear
passenger on the passenger’s side hook over
the floor anchors, which keep the mats from
sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning,
turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.

Unlock

Lock
Maintenance

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

* Not available on all models

499

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

500 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
Maintenance

500

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Air Intake Vents

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

501 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax

1Applying Wax

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Continued

Maintenance

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

501

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

502 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Maintenance

502

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

503 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 504
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 505
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 511

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................512
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 513
Jump Starting.................................... 514
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 517

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 518
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 520
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 520
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 521

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On............................522

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 523
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 524
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 526
Emergency Towing........................... 527

If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On.................................. 522

503

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

504 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Jack

Tool Case

Handling the Unexpected

504

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

505 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Manual transmission models

2. Move the shift lever to (R .
All models

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Handling the Unexpected

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever to (P .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

505

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

506 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Tool Case

Spare Tire

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

The tire to be replaced.

506

Wheel
Blocks

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

507 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

507

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

508 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Jack
Handle
Bar

508

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

509 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Continued

509

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

510 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire
Spacer
Cone
Wing
Bolt

For
compact
spare tire
Handling the Unexpected

510

For
full-size
tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 436

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

511 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 514

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.

Checklist
Check brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.

2 Battery P. 494

If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 524

2 Starting the Engine P. 401, 403

Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 103

Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.

Handling the Unexpected

●

2 Fuel Gauge P. 81

Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 526

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 527

511

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

512 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Handling the Unexpected

512

If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button within 10 seconds
after the beeper sounds and the indicator
stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

513 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Canadian automatic transmission/CVT models

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.

Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

Handling the Unexpected

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.

1Emergency Engine Stop

Manual transmission models

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

513

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

514 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure

Handling the Unexpected

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
4-cylinder models
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15Booster Battery
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
6-cylinder models
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.

Booster Battery

514

1Jump Starting

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

515 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuJump Startingu

4-cylinder models

4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

6-cylinder models

Handling the Unexpected

Continued

515

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

516 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

516

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

517 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Shift Lever Does Not Move
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
All models

Cover

Shift Lock
Release Slot

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Handling the Unexpected

Slot

Release Button

517

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

518 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

■ First thing to do

Handling the Unexpected

518

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

519 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do

1How to Handle Overheating

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

MAX
MIN

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the engine coolant
reserve tank is low, add coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

519

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

520 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

520

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

521 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

■ Check Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
Handling the Unexpected

• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
521

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

522 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S.

Canada

Handling the Unexpected

522

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

523 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

523

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

524 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Handling the Unexpected

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

IG Main 1
IG Main 2*4

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1

524

Circuit Protected
−
−
−
−
Front Fog Light *
Horn
Stop Light
FI Sub
DRL
IG Coil
Injector*2
Hazard
Fuse Box Main 2
Fuse Box Option 2

Circuit Protected
Battery
EPS
Fuse Box Main 1
Fuse Box Option 1
−
−
ABS/VSA FSR
ABS/VSA Motor

* Not available on all models

Amps
125 A
70 A
(60 A)
(40 A)
−
−
40 A
30 A

Sub Fan Motor

Headlight Low Beam Main
Fuse Box
Wiper Motor
Main Fan Motor
Starter Motor*4
13
Rear Defogger
14
Heater Motor
15
FI Main

Amps
−
−
−
−
(15 A)
10 A
10 A
15 A
(7.5 A)
15 A
20 A
15 A
60 A
(40 A)
50 A
30 A*4
30 A
20 A*2
30 A*3
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
15 A

Circuit Protected
16
Heated Door Mirror *
17
MG Clutch
18
DBW
19
Small Light
20
Interior Light
21
Back Up
22
Audio
23
Fan Timer
24 Right Headlight Low Beam
25 Left Headlight Low Beam
26
−

Amps
(10 A)
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
−

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

*2:4-cylinder models
*3:6-cylinder models
*4:Models with smart entry system

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

525 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Interior Fuse Box

10
11
12
13

Located under the dashboard.

14
15
Fuse Label

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Circuit Protected
A/C
DRL
−
−
Meter
SRS
Option *
MISS SOL
Fuel Pump

* Not available on all models

Amps
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
10 A
20 A

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Amps
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
15 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
−
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
15 A
(10 A)
20 A

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h

Circuit Protected
Amps
Front Passenger’s Power
20 A
Window
Rear Driver Side Power
20 A
Window *
Rear Passenger Side Power
20 A
Window *
*
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
(20 A)
ACCESSORY
7.5 A
−
−
Left Headlight High Beam
10 A
Accessory Power Socket
20 A
(Console Panel)
Driver Side Rear Door Lock * 10 A
Door Lock
20 A
Audio *
(7.5 A)
ACM *
(20 A)
Rear Seat Heaters *
(15 A)
Premium Amp *
(20 A)
−
−
−
−
Passenger’s Power Seat
(20 A)
Reclining *
Passenger’s Power Seat
(20 A)
Sliding *

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.

16
17
18

Circuit Protected
ABS/VSA
−
Front Wiper
ACG
Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining *
Moonroof *
Front Seat Heaters *
−
Passenger Side Door
Unlock
Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock *
Driver’s Door Lock
Passenger Side Door Lock
Driver’s Door Unlock
SRS
Illumination
Key Lock
Parking Lights
Lumbar Support *
Right Headlight High Beam
Washer
SMART *
Driver’s Power Window

525

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

526 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse

Combined
Fuse

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of
an ignition switch.

526

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 524 to 525.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

527 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Handling the Unexpected

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

527

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

528

528 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

529 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 530
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number ......................................... 534
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 535
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 536

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 537
Warranty Coverages ........................ 539
Authorized Manuals......................... 541
Customer Service Information......... 542

529

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

530 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Specifications
■ Engine Specifications

4-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Information

530

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:

Honda Accord Coupe

Displacement
Spark Plugs

144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)
DILKAR7G11GS
NGK
DILKAR7H11GS
DENSO
DXE22HQR-D11S

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)*1
4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)*2
Canada: 1,900 kg*3
1,930 kg*4

■ Washer Fluid

U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2
Canada: 1,040 kg*3
1,055 kg*4
U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)*1
2,006 lbs (910 kg)*2
Canada: 890 kg*3
910 kg*4
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8

LX-S models
Except LX-S models
LX models
Except LX models

* Not available on all models

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

Tank Capacity

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights *
35W (H8)
Parking Lights
5W
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors) *
Brake/Taillights
21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lights
3CP
Back-Up Lights
16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights
21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
LED
Rear License Plate Lights
5W
Trunk Light
5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights
8W
Ceiling Light
8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

531 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) Fluid
Specified
Capacity

HCF-2
Change

Capacity
3.9 US qt (3.7 ℓ)

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Recommended

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)
filter

Regular

■ Engine Coolant

Compact
Spare

Specified
Ratio

Wheel Size

Capacity

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.65 US gal (6.23 ℓ)*1
1.65 US gal (6.25 ℓ)*2
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

215/55R17 94V

33 (225 [2.3])
33 (225 [2.3])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7 1/2J
16 x 4T

*1: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models
*2: Manual transmission models

Information
Continued

531

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

532 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Engine Specifications

6-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications

Displacement

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating

Honda Accord Coupe

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)*1
4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*2
Canada: 1,990 kg*1
2,030 kg*2

■ Washer Fluid

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Information

532

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type

U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)*1
2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2
Canada: 1,090 kg*1
1,145 kg*2
U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)
Canada: 910 kg
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8

*1: Manual transmission models
*2: Automatic transmission models

* Not available on all models

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

Tank Capacity

212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B11
DENSO
SXU22HCR11
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■ Light Bulbs
55W (H11) *
LED *
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights
35W (H8)
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors)
Brake/Taillights
21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lights
3CP
Back-Up Lights
16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights
21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
LED
Rear License Plate Lights
5W
Trunk Light
5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights
8W
Ceiling Light
8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights
2CP
Headlights (Low Beam)

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

533 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.2 US qt (2.1 ℓ)

■ Engine Oil
Recommended

Capacity

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
filter

Regular

■ Engine Coolant

Compact
Spare

Specified
Ratio

Wheel Size

Capacity

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.7 US gal (6.3 ℓ)*1
1.7 US gal (6.5 ℓ)*2
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

235/45R18 94V

33 (225 [2.3])
32 (220 [2.2])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
18 x 8J
16 x 4T

*1: Manual transmission models
*2: Automatic transmission models

Information

533

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

534 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number and transmission number are
shown as follows.

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.

Vehicle Identification Number
4-cylinder models

Engine Number
Cover
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Number
Manual Transmission
Number
Information

6-cylinder models

Engine Number
Manual Transmission
Number
Automatic Transmission
Number

534

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

535 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Remote Transmitter
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.

Information

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

535

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

536 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

536

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

537 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Information

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

Continued

537

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

538 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

538

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

539 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued

539

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

540 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Information

540

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

541 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you
may require.

■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

Information

541

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

542 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009

Information

542

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 534
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

543 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

■ Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)

■ Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or

embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
Continued

Information

Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or
www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.

543

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

544 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.

Information

The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any

544

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are errorfree or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009

■ Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora application
installed on your mobile device. (Visit the
Apple iTunes store or Google Play
Marketplace to download the latest
version.)
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com or on your
smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
• Android devices must be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices
may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

545 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Information

Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com . Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.

545

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

546 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 411
Operation ................................................ 412

Index

546

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 442
Accessories and Modifications ................. 450
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 140
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 469
Engine Oil................................................ 463
Washer.................................................... 474
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 463
Adjusting
Clock......................................................... 86
Front Seats .............................................. 127
Head Restraints........................................ 130
Mirrors .................................................... 125
Rear Seats................................................ 134
Steering Wheel ........................................ 124
Temperature.............................................. 84
AhaTM Radio ...................................... 205, 258
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System) .................................................... 144
Changing the Mode ................................ 144
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 145
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 144
Sensor ..................................................... 147

Synchronized Mode................................. 146
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 144
Air Pressure............................... 486, 531, 533
Airbags........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision ........................................ 42
Airbag Care............................................... 51
Event Data Recorder.................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 42
Indicator.............................................. 49, 72
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 50
Sensors ..................................................... 39
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 48
AM/FM Radio............................ 163, 189, 228
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 442
Indicator.................................................... 71
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 155
Audio System............................................ 150
Adjusting the Sound................ 161, 187, 218
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 152
Error Messages........................................ 264
General Information ................................ 270
HDD........................................................ 238
Internet Radio ......................... 171, 203, 256
iPod ........................................ 168, 199, 248
MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 173, 206, 259
Reactivating ............................................ 153
Recommended CDs................................. 271
Recommended Devices............................ 273
Remote Controls ..................................... 155

Security Code ......................................... 153
Theft Protection ...................................... 153
Touch Screen .................................. 179, 212
USB Flash Drives...................................... 273
USB Port ................................................. 151
Authorized Manuals ................................ 541
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 98
Customize ...................................... 285, 303
Automatic Lighting.................................. 116
Automatic Transmission
Creeping................................................. 408
Fluid ....................................................... 472
Kickdown ............................................... 408
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 19, 414
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 517
Shifting................................................... 413
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 152
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 83

B
Battery ...................................................... 494
Charging System Indicator ................ 69, 520
Jump Starting ......................................... 514
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 494
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 495
Belts (Seat).................................................. 32
Beverage Holders ..................................... 139
Bluetooth® Audio..................... 176, 209, 262
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 314, 351
Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 63

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

547 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Brake System ............................................ 440
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 442
Brake Assist System................................. 443
Fluid ....................................................... 473
Foot Brake .............................................. 441
Indicator ........................................... 68, 522
Parking Brake.......................................... 440
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 68
Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 68
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 120
Bulb Replacement.................................... 475
Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn
Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker
Lights.................................................... 481
Fog Lights ............................................... 478
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 479
Headlights .............................................. 475
High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 482
Parking Lights ......................................... 480
Parking/Daytime Running Lights.............. 480
Rear License Plate Lights ......................... 482
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights.................................................... 479
Bulb Specifications........................... 530, 532

Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 64
Cargo Hooks............................................. 141
Carrying Cargo ................................. 393, 395
CD Player .................................. 165, 196, 235

Compass .................................................... 389
Console Compartment ............................. 137
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Creeping ................................................. 408
Fluid........................................................ 471
Kickdown................................................ 408
Operating the Shift Lever................... 18, 410
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 517
Shifting ................................................... 409
Controls....................................................... 85
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 469
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank...................................................... 469
Adding to the Radiator............................ 470
Overheating ............................................ 518
Creeping (Automatic Transmission/
CVT) ......................................................... 408
Cruise Control........................................... 421
Indicator.................................................... 77
Cup Holders .............................................. 139
Customer Service Information................. 542
Customized Features................................ 274

D
Daytime Running Lights ..........................
Dead Battery.............................................
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .................................................
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ...............

118
514

Index

Center Pocket ........................................... 138
Certification Label .................................... 534
Changing Bulbs......................................... 475
Charging System Indicator ................. 69, 520
Child Safety................................................. 52
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 102
Child Seat .................................................... 52
Booster Seats............................................. 63
Child Seat for Infants ................................. 54
Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 55
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 59
Larger Children.......................................... 62
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 56
Using a Tether ........................................... 61
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 500
Cleaning the Interior ................................ 498
Climate Control System ............................ 144
Changing the Mode ................................ 144
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 145
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 144
Sensors.................................................... 147
Synchronized Mode ................................. 146
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 144
Clock ............................................................ 86
Clutch Fluid ............................................... 473
Coat Hook ................................................. 141
Compact Spare Tire .................. 505, 531, 533

145
535

547

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

Index

548

548 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 115
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 125
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 464
Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 115
Display Button .......................... 157, 182, 214
Door Mirrors ............................................. 126
Doors ........................................................... 88
Auto Door Locking .................................... 98
Auto Door Unlocking................................. 98
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 31, 72
Keys .......................................................... 88
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside................................................. 96
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside.............................................. 91
Lockout Prevention System ........................ 95
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 488
Driving....................................................... 391
Automatic Transmission/CVT ................... 408
Braking.................................................... 440
Cruise Control ......................................... 421
Shifting Gear ................................... 413, 417
Shifting Position....................................... 409
Starting the Engine .......................... 401, 403
Driving Position Memory System............. 122
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497

E
Eco Assist System .......................................... 9
ECON Button ............................................ 420
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 73, 522
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 432
Emergency ................................................ 527
Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 513
Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 102
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 537
Engine ....................................................... 534
Coolant................................................... 469
Jump Starting.......................................... 514
Oil........................................................... 463
Starting ........................................... 401, 403
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 110
Engine Coolant......................................... 469
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank...................................................... 469
Adding to the Radiator............................ 470
Overheating ............................................ 518
Temperature Gauge .................................. 81
Engine Oil ................................................. 463
Adding.................................................... 466
Checking................................................. 464
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 455
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 520
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 463
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 111

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ........ 73
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide) ................................................ 64
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 126
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 500
Exterior Mirrors........................................ 126

F
Features .................................................... 149
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 497
Oil .......................................................... 467
Flat Tire..................................................... 505
Floor Mats ................................................ 499
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 472
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 473
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 471
Engine Coolant ....................................... 469
Manual Transmission .............................. 471
Windshield Washer ................................. 474
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 74
Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 134
Foot Brake ................................................ 441
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 424
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Front Seats................................................ 127
Adjusting ................................................ 127

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

549 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Fuel ..................................................... 20, 447
Economy................................................. 449
Gauge ...................................................... 81
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 83
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 71
Range ....................................................... 84
Recommendation.................................... 447
Refueling ................................................ 447
Fuel Economy ........................................... 449
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 20, 448
Message ................................................. 521
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 20, 448
Fuses ......................................................... 524
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 526
Locations ........................................ 524, 525

H
Halogen Bulbs................................... 475, 478
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 503
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ....................... 314, 351
Auto Answer ................................... 330, 366
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History .................................... 332, 368
Automatic Transferring .................... 330, 366
Displaying Messages ........................ 346, 385
Editing User Name ................................... 365
HFL Buttons ..................................... 314, 351
HFL Menus ...................................... 317, 353
HFL Status Display ........................... 316, 352
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 316, 352
Making a Call .................................. 336, 377
Options During a Call ...................... 343, 382
Phone Setup .................................... 322, 357
Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 372
Receiving a Call ............................... 342, 381
Receiving a Text/E-Mail Message...... 344, 383
Ring Tone ........................................ 331, 367
Selecting a Mail Account ................. 345, 384
Speed Dial ....................................... 333, 369
To Create a Security PIN .................. 329, 364
To Set Up a Text/E-Mail Message
Options ......................................... 327, 362
Use Contact Photo .......................... 331, 367

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio .................. 238
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 130
Headlights................................................. 115
Aiming .................................................... 475
Automatic Operation............................... 116
Dimming ......................................... 115, 118
Operating................................................ 115
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 143
High Beam Indicator .................................. 74
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 402, 406
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 312

I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 534
Vehicle Identification ............................... 534
Ignition Switch ......................................... 110
Illumination Control
Knob....................................................... 120
Immobilizer System .................................. 103
Indicator.................................................... 74
Indicators .................................................... 68
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 71
Brake System (Amber) ............................... 68
Brake System (Red).................................... 68
Charging System ............................... 69, 520
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 77, 422
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 77, 421

Index

Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 449
Gauge ...................................................... 81
Information............................................. 447
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 83
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 71
Refueling ................................................ 447
Gauges........................................................ 81
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 413
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 409
Manual Transmission .............................. 418

Glass (care) ................................................ 501
Glove Box .................................................. 137

549

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

Index

550

550 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Door and Trunk Open................................ 72
ECON Mode ...................................... 77, 420
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 73, 522
Fog Light ................................................... 74
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 75
High Beam................................................. 74
Immobilizer System.................................... 74
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ................. 76
Light Control ............................................. 78
Lights On................................................... 74
Low Fuel.................................................... 71
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 69, 520
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 73, 436, 438
Maintenance Minder ......................... 77, 455
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 69, 521
Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 68, 522
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 33, 71
Security System Alarm ............................... 74
Smart Entry System.................................... 77
Starter System ........................................... 78
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 49, 72
Transmission.............................................. 71
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 73
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System............................................. 72, 432
VSA® OFF .......................................... 72, 433
Washer Level ............................................. 77
Information............................................... 529
Information Display.................................... 82

Instant Fuel Economy................................. 83
Instrument Panel ........................................ 67
Brightness Control................................... 120
Interface Dial ............................................ 211
Interior Lights ........................................... 135
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 125

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 508
Jump Starting ........................................... 514

K
Key Number Tag......................................... 89
Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 95
Keys ............................................................. 88
Lockout Prevention.................................... 95
Master Keys .............................................. 88
Number Tag .............................................. 89
Remote Transmitter................................... 91
Types and Functions .................................. 88
Valet Key........................................... 89, 101
Won’t Turn ............................................... 23
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission/
CVT) ......................................................... 408

L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 428
LaneWatchTM ............................................ 434
Language (HFL) ................................ 316, 352
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 57
Lights ................................................ 115, 475
Automatic............................................... 116
Bulb Replacement ................................... 475
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 118
Fog Lights ............................................... 117
High Beam Indicator ................................. 74
Interior.................................................... 135
Light Switches......................................... 115
Lights On Indicator.................................... 74
Turn Signals ............................................ 115
Load Limits ............................................... 395
Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 88
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................... 98
From Inside ............................................... 96
From Outside ............................................ 91
Keys.......................................................... 88
Using a Key............................................... 95
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 95
Low Battery Charge ................................. 520
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 71
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 69, 520
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength.................................................... 90
Lower Anchors ........................................... 57
Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 530, 532
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 395

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

551 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 534

O
Odometer.................................................... 83
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 463
Adding .................................................... 466
Checking ................................................. 464
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 455
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 69, 520
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 463
Viscosity .................................................. 463
Opening/Closing
Hood ....................................................... 461
Moonroof................................................ 109
Power Windows ...................................... 106
Trunk ........................................................ 99
Outside Temperature Display .................... 84
Overheating .............................................. 518

P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode) ...................................................... 411
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift
Mode) ...................................................... 415
Pandora® ................................... 172, 204, 257
Panic Mode ............................................... 105

Parking...................................................... 444
Parking Brake ........................................... 440
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator............................................ 68, 522
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 50
Passing Indicators ..................................... 115
Power Windows ....................................... 106
Precautions While Driving ....................... 407
Rain ........................................................ 407
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 505

R
Radiator .................................................... 470
Radio (AM/FM) ......................... 163, 189, 228
Radio (SiriusXM®) ............................. 193, 232
Radio Data System (RDS) ......... 164, 191, 230
Range .......................................................... 84
RDS (Radio Data System) ......... 164, 191, 230
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 537
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 121
Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 134
Rearview Camera ..................................... 446
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 125
Refueling .................................................. 447
Fuel Gauge................................................ 81
Gasoline.................................. 447, 530, 532
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 71
Regulations............................... 438, 488, 535

Index

Maintenance ............................................ 451
Battery.................................................... 494
Brake/Clutch Fluid................................... 473
Cleaning ................................................. 498
Climate Control System .......................... 497
Coolant .................................................. 469
Maintenance MinderTM............................ 455
Oil .......................................................... 464
Precautions ............................................. 452
Radiator.................................................. 470
Remote Transmitter ................................ 495
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 475
Safety ..................................................... 453
Service Items........................................... 457
Tires........................................................ 485
Transmission Fluid................................... 471
Under the Hood...................................... 459
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 69, 521
Manual Transmission ............................... 417
Map Lights................................................ 136
Maximum Load Limit............................... 395
Meters, Gauges .......................................... 81
Mirrors ...................................................... 125
Adjusting ................................................ 125
Door ....................................................... 126
Exterior ................................................... 126
Interior Rearview..................................... 125
Modifications (and Accessories).............. 450
Moonroof ................................................. 109
MP3................... 165, 173, 196, 206, 235, 259

Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 445

551

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

552 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Remote Transmitter.................................... 91
Replacement
Battery..................................................... 495
Bulbs ....................................................... 475
Fuses ............................................... 524, 525
Tires ........................................................ 491
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 483
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 536
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 83

Index

552

Safe Driving................................................. 27
Safety Check................................................ 31
Safety Labels ............................................... 65
Safety Message ............................................. 1
Seat Belts..................................................... 32
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 34
Checking ................................................... 38
Fastening................................................... 35
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 59
Pregnant Women ...................................... 37
Reminder................................................... 33
Warning Indicator................................ 33, 71
Seat Heaters .............................................. 143
Seats .......................................................... 127
Adjusting................................................. 127
Front Seats .............................................. 127
Rear Seats................................................ 134
Seat Heaters ............................................ 143

Security System......................................... 103
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 74
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 74
Select/Reset Knob....................................... 82
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 56
Selector Knob (Audio)...................... 156, 178
Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 415
Operation................................................ 416
Shift Lever........................... 18, 409, 413, 417
Operation.......................... 18, 410, 414, 417
Releasing................................................. 517
Won’t Move............................................ 517
Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 70, 410, 414
Shifting (Transmission)............. 409, 413, 417
Side Airbags................................................ 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 48
SiriusXM® Radio................................ 193, 232
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ....................................................... 93
Snow Tires................................................. 493
Spare Tire.................................. 505, 531, 533
Spark Plugs ....................................... 530, 532
Specifications............................................ 530
Specified Fuel ........................... 447, 530, 532
Speedometer .............................................. 81
SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 42
Starting the Engine .......................... 401, 403
Does Not Start......................................... 511
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 110
Jump Starting.......................................... 514

Steering Wheel ........................................ 124
Adjusting ................................................ 124
Stopping ................................................... 444
Summer Tires............................................ 493
Sunglasses Holder .................................... 142
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 42
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 110
SYNC Mode .............................................. 146

T
Tachometer ................................................ 81
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display .................... 84
Temperature Sensor .......................... 84, 147
Time (Setting)............................................. 86
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)..................................................... 436
Indicator ........................................... 73, 523
Tires .......................................................... 485
Air Pressure............................. 486, 531, 533
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 485
Inspection ............................................... 485
Labeling.................................................. 486
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 505
Regulations............................................. 488
Rotation.................................................. 492
Spare Tire ............................... 505, 531, 533
Summer.................................................. 493
Tire Chains.............................................. 493

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

553 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Trunk ........................................................... 99
Lid ............................................................. 99
Light Bulb ........................................ 530, 532
Main Switch ............................................ 101
Turn Signals .............................................. 115
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 73

U
Unlocking the Doors .................................. 91
Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ........ 13
USB Flash Drives........................................ 273
USB Port .................................................... 151
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ....................................................... 93

V
Valet Key ............................................. 89, 101
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 534
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) .................. 432
Off Button ............................................... 433
Off Indicator .............................................. 72
System Indicator ........................................ 72
Ventilation ................................................ 144
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 463, 531, 533
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 432

W
Warning and Information Messages......... 79
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 520
Warning Labels........................................... 65
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 539
Watts................................................. 530, 532
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 490
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 508
Window Washers ..................................... 119
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 474
Switch..................................................... 119
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 106
Windshield................................................ 119
Cleaning ................................................. 501
Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 145
Washer Fluid ........................................... 474
Wiper Blades ........................................... 483
Wipers and Washers................................ 119
Winter Tires .............................................. 493
Snow Tires .............................................. 493
Tire Chains .............................................. 493
Wipers and Washers................................. 119
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 483
WMA ................. 165, 173, 196, 206, 235, 259
Worn Tires ................................................ 485

Index

Wear Indicators....................................... 490
Winter .................................................... 493
Tools ......................................................... 504
Towing a Trailer....................................... 397
Equipment and Accessories..................... 398
Load Limits ............................................. 397
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 400
Emergency.............................................. 527
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 436
Indicator ........................................... 73, 523
Transmission............................. 409, 413, 417
Automatic............................................... 413
Continuously Variable (CVT).................... 409
Fluid ............................................... 471, 472
Manual ................................................... 417
Number .................................................. 534
Shift Lever Position Indicator ..... 70, 410, 414
Trip Meter .................................................. 83
Troubleshooting ...................................... 503
Blown Fuse ..................................... 524, 525
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 24
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 24
Emergency Towing ................................. 527
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 511
Noise When Braking ................................. 25
Overheating............................................ 518
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 505
Shift Lever Won’t Move .......................... 517
Warning Indicators.................................... 68

553

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

554 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

555 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

15 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6200.book

556 ページ

２０１４年７月２３日 水曜日 午後１２時２６分

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2014:07:25 13:23:36-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2014:07:25 13:23:36-07:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2014:07:25 13:23:36-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:c37980b1-1991-4876-a2c9-267902a3bd4e
Instance ID                     : uuid:3a4e395f-40af-4b43-a07c-67cde275a764
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 557

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honda 2015 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2015-Accord-Coupe-2-Door-Owners-Manual-106962 honda-2015-accord-coupe-2-door-owners-manual-106962

Coupe Owners Manual Pdf A3L1515OM 2015 Honda Accord Coupe Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation